Home

LogBook/300 & /360 User`s Manual

Contents

1. Green LED indicates ready for card exchange PC Cards remove one and insert another Swapping PC Cards in a LogBook 300 Note Some models have PC Card doors with right edge hinges not shown ndfe Swapping time is measured from when the door opens Keep door closed unless you are Y in the process of swapping cards PC Cards must be pre configured by Log View f anticipating the need for multiple cards download the exact SAME ACQUISITION SETUP FILE to each PC Card The PCMCIA slot accepts a Type I II or IH hard disk card or ATA flash memory solid state card How to Download a Configuration to a PC Card The download of a configuration to a PC Card can be done in either of two ways both of which make use of LogView s lt Download gt button One method is to download the file to the PC Card while it is installed in a card slot on the PC The second method is to download the file while the PC Card is in a LogBook In that scenario the LogBook must be connected to the serial or parallel port of a PC A brief description of both methods follows In both cases the filename will be the same as the LogView setup name Download Method I Download Method Il PC Card in Computer s PC Card Slot PC Card in LogBook s PC Card Slot LogView s lt Download gt button as it appears 4 LogView s lt Download gt button as it appears ZA when a PC Card in the PC can accept a cars when a PC Card in the LogBook can accept a Downl
2. 989592 LogView LV 55 A meters configuration menu lower left corner of figure will appear when you place the mouse pointer over a meter and click the right mouse button This menu allows you to access various dialog boxes for changing parameters for meters The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below Note The Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters Scale Limits Misc H Cancel High 100 Lowy 100 Mote These screen images have been condensed Format 0 T lt gt Select Channel High 100 Low E OU The z T set Scale e Meters extension is obtained CN ne by pressing More gt gt Show Peak Hold Indicator Show Limits M Reset Peak Hold Indicator Scale Limits Misc H Show Trend Indicator 4 LH2 FP Show Peak Hold Indicators H3 CH4 Cancel Apply More gt gt All None Meters Configuration Menu Scale Limits amp Misc Dialog Boxes Meters Extension Dialog Box Meters Show Trend Indicator Set Limits Show Limits Properties Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes Configuring a Meter 1 Bring up the desired meter group Bar Graph Analog or Digital 2 Place the mouse cursor over the meter to reconfigure 3 Click on the right mouse button A Meters Configuration Menu will appear see figure above 4
3. select the greater than symbol gt This entry will appear in the equation box ig Equation Assistant CALC O04 P1 CH14 gt 23 Analog Inputs Digital Inputs Calc Channels GPS Inputs Arithmetic P1_CH14 A a kaa AA A elational and Equality Logical And Or Not Insert OF Cancel Equation Assistant Dialog Box 9 With the cursor placed after the greater than symbol gt type 23 10 Verify that your function appears correctly and click the lt Validate gt button Validate will verify that you have a useable equation and will inform you when there is a problem with an equation For example you may have a missing parenthesis 11 If necessary correct your equation and validate the new one 12 Click the lt OK gt button This closes the Equation Assistant 989592 Software Reference Though the previous ten steps pertain to the first example aside from functional differences the method is essentially the same for the remaining three examples A figure and table have been placed after the examples to identify various button options available with the Equation Assistant Example 2 CALC_00 And P1_CH15 gt 24 3 Calculated Channel Configuration Of x Edit Enter function expression CALC_00 And P1_CH15 gt 24 Foo a marek En User Label On Off Calculation Function m Channel o o a 0 CALC_O0 Pi CHi4 gt 23 Yes CALC D2 CALC 02 FP1_CH14 P1_CH15
4. Note Files with high rates take up more memory than files with slow rates Auto Re arm is used when multiple trigger events need to be captured When the auto re arm feature is enabled LogBook will arm itself wait for a trigger collect the pre and post trigger then re arm itself and repeat the process The pre and post trigger data surrounding a trigger point is called a Trigger Block A new file is created for each Trigger Block If only one rate is used and three Trigger Blocks are collected the file names would look similar to the following TEST R1 B1 1 BIN In each case R1 indicates Rate 1 B1 B2 and B3 indicate Trigger TEST R1 B2 1 BIN Blocks 1 2 and 3 respectively The 1 in each case indicates TEST R1 B3 1 BIN Segment 1 Uploads can be performed while data is being collected For applications that require continuous acquisition uploads can be performed periodically to make space for additional data Each uploaded portion of a single Trigger Block is called a Segment If one rate is used and a Trigger Block was uploaded in five Segments the file names would look similar to the following TEST R1 B1 1 BIN In each case R1 indicates Rate 1 Bl indicates Trigger Block 1 and TEST R1 B1 2 BIN 1 through 5 indicates Segment 1 through Segment 5 TEST R1 B1 3 BIN TEST R1 B1 4 BIN TEST R1 B1 5 BIN LV 50 LogView 989592 Software Reference Merging and Concatenating LogView s raw binary format can n
5. 4 6 LogBook User s Manual 989492 vil DBK Basics Chapter 5 LBK and other non DBK Options LBK Options Location Reference 5 1 LBK COM 422 485 5 2 LBK MEM1 U Expanded Memory 16 MB Upgrade 5 3 LBK1 Remote LogBook Terminal 5 4 LBK2 Four Channel Digital to Analog Output 5 9 Remote On Off Switch and LED Indicator Options 5 11 Chapter 6 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection Chapter 7 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler Chapter 8 CE Compliance Overview 8 1 CE Standards and Directives 8 1 Safety Conditions 8 2 Emissions immunity Conditions 8 3 CE Enhancements 8 3 Edge Guards for DBK5 DBK8 amp DBK44 8 3 DBK41 CE 8 4 BNC Connectors for CE Compliance 8 4 LogView Understanding LogView LV 1 Modes of LogView Operation LV 2 LogView Features and Capabilities LV 5 Software User Interface LV 5 File Managemert LV 8 Note Use of the following Procedures LV 12 a Authorization Code will enable Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition LV 13 Using an Attached LogBook LV 13 Using LogBook Unattached LV 15 Simple Data Logging LV 15 ED7B55484273 Setting Up DBK Cards LV 17 Using Multiple Timebases LV 18 Using Digital 2 Point Calibration LV 21 Using Digital Outputs As Alarms LV 22 Using Exception Capturing LV 24 Me
6. 500 500 500 500 10 00 10 00 10 00 1 f 10 00 10 00 1 10 00 4 1 P1_CHOO 2 P1_CH01 8 P1_CHO2 4 P1_CH03 5 P1_CH04 6 P1_CH0S 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Volt Volt olt Volt Volt Volt RE LOGVIEW Analog Meters Control View gt m5 2 8 EIN 0 00 0 00 250 aot 250 500 vite 5 00 5 00 500 10 00 10 00 1 P1_CHO0 Volt 0 00 3 P1_CHO02 Volt 0 00 0 00 0 00 500 viles 5 00 viles 500 v Pi ty J 10 00 10 00 10 00 0 00 4 P1_CHO3 Volt Software Reference Digital Meters no toolbar icon Fa LOGVIEW Digital Meters lO x Control View a SEI 0 00 rea 0 00 2 P1_CHO1 Volt 0 00 3 P1_CHO02 Volt 0 0 0 4 P1_CHO03 Volt 0 00 5 P1_CH04 Volt Selecting the Digital Meters icon brings up the Digital Meters window to display several channels in numeric format To activate the display select the lt Start gt button on the left side of the toolbar or Start All Indicators in the pull down menu or in the toolbar You can vary the number of channels 32 max displayed by selecting the input box at the end of 0 00 6 P1_CHO5 Volt 0 00 7 P1_CHOB Volt 0 00 8 P1_CHO z Volt 0 00 9 P1_CHO08 Volt 0 0 0 10 P1_CHO9 Volt the toolbar The lt Grid gt button next to last item on toolbar is used to arrange the display for convenient reading The pushpin icon in the
7. Help bos explains the use the current windaw field ar cursor position Channel List 1 per row read channel s parameter values across the row Parameter Column Labels all coluring cannot be displayed at the same time Tabs to sub windows lc View related parameters In the User Label column use the default channel labels or insert your own labels of up to 16 characters the column width is flexible Labels are saved with the data so more meaningful channel names will appear in your post acquisition display and analysis software For example a calculated channel that controls an alarm can be so named several channels that are combined for a calculated channel can be so named etc When possible use User Label names that closely resemble the Physical Channel names This practice makes channel identification easier to remember and helps avoid confusion Example If Physical Channel P1_CH01 was being used for an alarm a User Label of P101Alarm would be logical In the On Off column use On to enable or Off to disable channels System performance for the enabled channels 1s improved by disabling not sampling the channels not in use The Reading column displays the real time channel value in the user s units The immediate feedback by this column allows you to optimize range settings verify scaling or validate sensor calibration For the Range column all LogBook channels and most DBK cards have a programmable gain amplifier PGA
8. LV 35 Serial GPS Channels LogBook 360 Only LV 36 Calculated Channel Configuration LV 36 Equation Assistant LV 37 Bitwise Operators LV 39 Logical Operators LV 39 Spreadsheet Model LV 6 Examples of Calculated Channels LV 40 Help Box LV 7 ue Acquisition Configuration LV 42 id laa Trigger Parameters Set LV 42 File Managemert LV 8 99 ie File Organization LV 8 Scan Rate Setup LV 43 Data File Genetati n LV 9 Event Marking Time Stamping LV 44 Naming Format for Data Files LV 9 Preferences LV 45 Customizing the File Name LV 10 Device Menu LV 47 Procedures LV 12 Select PC Card LV 47 Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition LV 12 Select LogBook LV 47 Using an Attached LogBook LV 12 Attach LV 47 Using LogBook Unattached LV 14 Break LV 47 Simple Data Logging LV 14 Arm Acquisition LV 47 Setting Up DBK Cards LV 16 Stop Acquisition LV 47 Using Multiple Timebases LV 17 LogBook Monitor LV 48 Using Digital 2 Point Calibration LV 20 Explorer LV 49 Using Digital Outputs As Alarms LV 21 Tools Menu LV 50 Using Exception Capturing LV 23 Convert Binary Data LV 50 Menu Descriptions LV 24 Merging Binary Data LV 52 File Menu LV 24 VEW Dale sae New LV 24 Indicators Menu LV 54 Open er LV 24 Bar Graph M
9. 5 Reset Clock Resets LogBook s clock to value of the host PC s clock LogView 989592 Software Reference 6 Manual Trigger Clicking the lt Manual Trigger gt button immediately activates the trigger or post trigger event This feature 1s also accessible via the LBK1 device 7 Explorer Clicking the lt Explorer gt button accesses LogBook s Explorer which allows you to search the PC Card for acquisition files and the indexed trigger blocks within the acquisition files The Explorer can be accessed from LogView s Device pull down menu The following section provides more detail Explorer has no toolbar The Explorer window can be reached from the Device menu or from the lt Explorer gt button in the icon itis selected 7 4 5 Book Monitor window Explorer allows you to search the PC Card for acquisition files and the from the Device as Ses gt yd indexed trigger blocks within the acquisition files The Exploring windows look first at the acquisitions Menu or the LogBook Monitor Saved to disk and then deeper into each trigger block within an acquisition The convention for naming files is described on page LV 9 In the following example see figure below TriggerBlock_2 2 uses TriggerBlock as the seed and 2 2 to indicate the 2 segment of the 2 trigger block The binary data file ends with the bin extension understood in the Log View Explorer Exploring LogBookC TTTS
10. 40 C to 80 C LogBook 360 Humidity 0 to 95 RH non condensing Size 14 x 11 x 3 5 in 356 x 279 x 89 mm PC Card Memory Standard ATA Type Weight 7 3 lb 3 3 kg A D Specifications Type Successive approximation Monotinicity No missing codes Resolution 16 bit Linearity 1 bit Conversion Time 10 us Analog Inputs Channels 16 single ended 8 differential Ranges Unipolar Bipolar operation is software programmable expandable up to 256 differential single on a per channel basis ended or differential operation is software BIPOLAR Reading uV programmable E l 10V 0 015 500 Connector DB37 male P1 5V 0 015 500 Maximum Overvoltage 35 V 45 V 2 5V 0 015 300 Input Current 1 25V 0 015 250 Differential 0 4 yA typical 0 7 uA max ey oe ae Single ended 0 2 yA typical 0 35 uA max 0 15625V 0 050 100 Input Impedance 10 MA differential in parallel with 20 pF pin ae gt Md 5 MA single ended in parallel with 30 pF aay aa Calibration Digital software calibration 0 to 5V 0 015 300 Channel to channel Crosstalk 100 dB 0 to 2 5V 0 015 250 O to 1 25V 0 015 150 O to 0 625V 0 020 150 O to 0 3125V 0 050 100 Triggering Analog Trigger Software Trigger Programmable Level Range full range of Trigger to A D Latency Dependent on PC specified channel Pre Trigger Up to 4 gig scans depends on Trigger to A D Latency 10 us max PC card memory Digital Trigger Logic Level Range 0 8 V low 2 2
11. Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components celal Saed y Hasu ze g INU Wad 404 000 r EDD E IZA EE ik z Sob dw DD 17 878394 Dimensional Drawings DIN 2 a m eo 9 213 003 000 FOR PEM NUT R 125 4 312 Pa ida 800 3 730 4 250 DD 18 878394 Dimensional Drawings 338 m 00 xX 00 O pum O Ya w Y I O O A dad Geel By 338 col WES ZOZ 438 l SELE BFE I Eps eis 067 z ESEI Os sad 0618 ee SiiS 3384 OSEE Ogg g L a3 434 ocre DLL OB E ozo SIIWld 3015 Yv4 WOH 008 Ol LE ANIS MAHL 9610 DD 19 878394 Dimensional Drawings TB 100 Terminal Connector Option DD 20 68 pin SCSI II Screw Terminal Board 878394 H CH CH CH Cl CM L MH me CH L me HH m CH CN me CH cH mt ml CM me MH gt Ml H mi CH D H H H mi CH m E 1 Ca a a a Ln e i gt J A if i 1 1 A iy A A 1 d J if 5 i 5 A y i r J A J 1 i A J J 7 I Maria Pl l a ed ip iat Ta TE e e ac AGND AGH 1 AGH AGNO AH ANH TO AGND AGHA AGH1 1 AGHO AH AHT AHD AGH AGH TS AGNE ACHE ANH 14 AGND ACH15 j AGND GND POSREF AGND NEGREF AGME XDACO AGND XDAC1 AGND MAPCR GND EGHD E ee oe yh q Poot pin es piui Er EER E e ll ll A a ran i o
12. Dynamic Mernary MBE Disk free space a2eKB ooo Disk used space 4639KB 7 Explorer Trigger Type LogBook Monitor 1 Event Mark Whenever you click the lt Event Mark gt button during an acquisition Log View notes the exact time to time correlate the marked instant with data collected then This function is like marking a strip chart to draw attention to a particular time frame These marks can be seen later while reviewing the data in an independent view application The lt Event Mark gt button will only be enabled when the Acquisition Configuration window s Enable Event Mark function is selected see following figure The event marking feature is also accessible via LBK1 Acquisition Configuration Trigger Block Detiritian iqqer Post trigqger Trigger t Internal Clock Max Frequency 25 0 kHz Fs Sool ir al land Selecting Enable Event Mark in the Acquisition Configuration Window 2 Clock Shows the current time according to LogBook s clock 3 Max Swap Time Maximum Disk Swap Time is the estimated amount of time available for removing and replacing LogBook s PCMCIA card without interruption to LogBook s active acquisition 4 Error The Error box contains an error number and brief description of the error should an error exist Error codes are provided near the end of this manual Not all errors are detrimental to the acquisition
13. Selecting the Analog Meter icon brings up the Analog Meters window to display several channels in a dial gage format To activate the display select the lt Start gt button on the left side of the toolbar or Start All Indicators in the pull down menu or in the toolbar You can vary the number of channels 32 max displayed by selecting the input box at the end of the toolbar The lt Grid gt button next to last item on toolbar is used to arrange the display for convenient reading The pushpin icon in the center of the toolbar locks this window on top of other windows until you unlock it by selecting the pushpin again 2 P1_CHO1 Volt 989592 Along with displaying channel data in real time in the setup spreadsheets Log View also provides auxiliary real time indicators The meter windows simulate the look of popular meter types the bar graph the analog dial and the digital readout Within each meter type you can adjust their display properties to fit your needs Such properties include number of channels high low limits peak hold trend indicator etc Next each meter type is shown and then their configuration is discussed they all work LOGVIEW Bar Graph Meters Control View Al CORK 5 00 10 00 10 00 4 10 00 4 10 00 4 10 00 4 125 5 00 5 00 500 5 00 5 00 250 7 0 00 000 000 0 00 H 000 al zj J J 6 25 500
14. T i Power Analog Passive Digital Passive DBK DBKs DBKs DBK DBK Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook 100 Series or 200 Series Device pg 2 DBK Basics 9e7798 Daag Systems The previous figure applies to LogBooks DaqBook 100 200 Series devices and ISA type DaqBoards As will be seen elsewhere in this document some devices do not include all three connectors 1 e P1 P2 and P3 Connecting DBKs to Daq PC Cards The Daq PC Card is only intended for connections to a P1 connector of a single passive DBK card or module A passive DBK card or module is one that provides a desired connectivity such as BNCs or screw terminals but performs no signal conditioning A CA 134 Interface Cable and a CN 86 F dual DB37 female adapter are used to provide the DB37 P1 connector Passive DBK with P1 No Signal Conditioning Dag PC Card P1 DB37 M PAS CN 86 F To PC Card Slot in Notebook PC lap P1 DB37 M CA 134 Daq PC Card Cabling The CA 134 cable connects to a CN 86 F adapter which then connects to a single passive card or module The passive DBKs are e DBK1 16 Connector BNC Module e DBK11A Screw Terminal Option Card e DBK40 BNC Analog Interface Reference Note For information regarding the passive DBKs DBK1 DBK11A and DBK40 refer to the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 3 Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard 2000 Series Boards
15. accept and convert directive The accept and convert directive must be the last item in the format string A format string can contain any or all of the following Format Description Example Comment directive The character signifies the Convert 1 3 character integer beginning of a conversion directive X is a decimal integer specifying the maximum length of the desired field while y is a character that specifies the conversion type Convert 1 character Convert 1 6 character float The followed by the character 3 61 Reject 7 characters convert an signifies the beginning of a rejecting i j integer directive X and y are the same as Reject 1 integer and a comma above convert 2 integer White space Tabs or spaces to be taken literally then 1 f Reject 1 integer and a space rejected convert a float Regular Literal characters that are to be SGPGGA f Match and reject GPGGA characters matched exactly in the serial input exactly convert a float string then rejected Format string examples LOAD E Match the literal LOAD then start converting a float S 14c Ignore the 1 14 characters then start converting an integer Ski a Si tt Ignore 3 integers followed by commas then start converting a float 6 8 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual The following table of examples shows how each f
16. Bim dh gt oo poo oboaD 2 23 a o bh ooo poo ooaD B4 m moo h ooo ooo ooaD o na h osa xl 00 9090 8 6 D ooon 00 7 7220 oo oe Tm e a Z02A4d Cr og a o W o o Mjjo o o Mfjo o o Mj o o Mija o o Mji o o 0 0 oj 0 o ojjo o o o LIZO LL AI 2 L gt O Y n D Ho 5 m moo 6080 ipod 2 009 9 o Al Ea mw o gt llo 2 o o Moa ooon n E 00 Oe ie e E e o gt E 3383 o gt B 5 libi Hoa O Doon gt E o0 one ee 1 Da 3 o gt 3 Ulsa Hoa O ooon a vo E 008 sm lt A o o E a a ig wo Hoa ooon 4 E 000d o o0406 o gt E SBJ2 o gt e mo Hoa ooon gt E ooo O as o E 5B13 ao 13 moo 9009090 pe gt E ooo O gee o A SBi4 ao 5 J m Moo o vo o e 12 ooo ROA Ble O a oo ll SERIAL NUMBER AAA XX lt da W O 00 DBK207 CJC 878394 SSO 8991 Or ZI These dimensions apply to the both the DBK207 and the DBK207 CJC Dimensional Drawings s5 D NAS GGO sJ yld GS Mayos 9 YO4 YIOWdS INN QHD Ov v Sv 0l gt uy y A lig Y TXXXX CZ L1 s5 91L g9L SOcrHdd SSaaddv OXXXX BDT DBK208 Dimensional Drawings 878394 DD 15 oeCC eC COCO OBER OBO OS LE E E E CHB H HH BEES FT 3 500 MeeeeeeeeeeeeecEureaegn oC CRBC HR EO BCH H HGH HH HG DBK209 DD 16 878394 00 192 TYP 4 PLACES A 3 100 Dimensional Drawings DIN 1
17. P2 and P3 For LogBook 300 these connectors are located on the rear panel For LogBook 360 they are on the front panel as discussed in the following note Connector pinouts begin on the next page Note LogBook 360 actually has two sets of P1 P2 and P3 connectors one internal set located on the motherboard and one external set located on the unit s front panel LogBook 360 s front panel P1 P2 and P3 connectors connect to the motherboard s P1 P2 and P3 via ribbon cables P1 Analog Input LogBook s P1 connector is compatible with all DBK options Features and capabilities of P1 signals include e High performance signal connection for 10 V and 0 20 V input ranges gains from x1 to x64 each gain and range calibrated individually and an input stage with low crosstalk high dynamic impedance small signal injection e All calibration is performed digitally there are no pots to adjust e The sequencer depth the number of channel readings in a scan is 1024 analog channels and 128 digital channels e PI includes an enhanced DBK 50 protocol that allows DBK cards or modules to identify themselves and carry their own calibration data These same connections provide for complete configuration of DBK cards with that capability while not requiring the use of jumpers CAUTION For analog signal inputs via P1 do not exceed 35 VDC or 45 VDC or equipment damage may result P2 Digital I O P2 is used with various kinds
18. See Chapter 2 System Power Each DBK10 can hold 3 DBK cards connected to transducers Multiple PC cards can be hand transported to and from PC and LogBook A LBK1 LogBook A Terminal optional LogView running on PC shown attached to LogBook via serial port DBK60 DBK60 analog or digital expansion module Holds up to 3 DBK cards Allows for various combinations of terminal panels See Note 1 A Few Possible Expansion Configurations Note 1 LogBook 360 not shown combines the features and capabilities of LogBook 300 with those of a DBK60 In addition LogBook 360 has two additional serial ports Power Options Power options are covered in the DBK Basics section which immediately follows this chapter Other Options LogBook GPS Global Positioning System amp Serial Device Data Collection Support LogBook 360 Only This software enabled option provides a means to collect serial data from various devices convert it to channel values and store it synchronously with the devices analog and digital inputs Virtually any serial device that sources continuous ASCII data including Global Positioning System GPS devices gas flow meters and scales is compatible GPS devices conforming to the NMEA 0183 standard are supported directly in the Log View interface so no knowledge of the data format is necessary Note The LogBook GPS option is enabled from the Authorization dialog box selected from LogView s File pul
19. Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu 5 If a dialog box is required for example to change a limit enter in the new value in the appropriate parameter box and press Apply or OK Pressing Apply implements your changes but keeps the dialog box open allowing you to make additional changes Pressing OK implements your changes and closes the dialog box The previous figure and the next table and the previous figure serve as a quick reference to meters configuration LV 56 LogView 989592 Software Reference Configure Meter Settings Function Descriptions Function Select Channel Set Scale Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator Show Trend Indicator Set Limits Show Limits Properties Description Select a new channel for display The selected channel will replace the one currently seen in the meter Note that double clicking the left mouse button in the meter region will also bring up a dialog box which allows you to select a new channel Set the high and low points of the scale as well as define the decimal place format Places high and low uni directional floating markers on the scale to indicate the highest and lowest values reached up to the present time This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters selection Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the res
20. Switch Only 1 Ko LED Wiring for LED Indicator Only TERMINAL DB9 Connector female What you will need a One Momentary Contact switch contact rating gt 5 ma DC or AC Push button style recommended b One Male DB9 connector with twisted wire 24 gage or better c 1K ohm resistor rated gt 0 125 W d LED rated at lt 50ma with operating voltage lt 3 VDC You may substitute a 500 ohm resistor to obtain a brighter LED display What you will need a One Momentary Contact switch contact rating gt 5 ma DC or AC Push button style recommended b One Male DB9 connector with twisted wire 24 gage or better What you will need a One Male DB9 connector with twisted wire 24 gage or better b 1K ohm resistor rated gt 0 125 W c LED rated at lt 50 ma with operating voltage lt 3 VDC You may substitute a 500 ohm resistor to obtain a brighter LED display FLED Switch LogBook 300 Being Connected to a Remote Push Button Switch and LED Indicator LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 11 Remote Switch and LED Indicator Specifications Momentary Contact Switch gt 5mA DC or AC push button style recommended Resistor 1K ohm rated at gt 0 125 W LED lt 50 mA operating voltage lt 3 VDC 5 12 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6
21. conversion amp The bitwise AND operator compares each bit of its first operand to the corresponding bit of its second operand If both bits are 1 the corresponding result bit is set to 1 Otherwise the corresponding result bit is set to 0 Example 10110000 amp 10010000 10010000 The bitwise OR operator compares each bit of its first operand to the corresponding bit of its second operand The operator is inclusive in that if either bit is 1 the corresponding result bit is set to 1 Otherwise the corresponding result bit is set to 0 Example 10110000 10010000 10110000 The bitwise NOT operator creates a bitwise compliment of its operand Thus a O switches to 1 and a 1 switches to 0 Example 10110000 01001111 Bitwise Left Shift and Right Shift Operators lt lt gt gt Syntax shift expression lt lt additive expression shift expression gt gt additive expression The bitwise shift operators shift their first operand left lt lt or right gt gt by the number of positions the second operand specifies Example 10110000 lt lt 2 11000000 Logical Operators Software Reference The logical operators perform logical AND logical OR and logical NOT operations Logical operators do not perform usual arithmetic conversions Instead they evaluate each operand in terms of its equivalence to 0 Thus the result of a logical operation is either 0 or 1 AND The logical AND operator produ
22. 00 to 59 and ss ss is seconds 00 00 to 59 99 Latitude ddmm mm where dd is degrees O to 89 and mm mm is minutes 00 00 to 59 99 Latitude N S N North S South Longitude dddmm mm where ddd is degrees 0 to 179 and mm mm is minutes 00 00 to 59 99 Longitude E W E East W West The format string of all serial input channels parsing information from the GGA line should start with GPGGA so that all other serial input strings fail to match and are ignored 6 10 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual One method of parsing the UTC is to create a single channel that parses the entire UTC In this case the channel type would be set to Sx_Float and the format string would be set to GPGGA f The value of the channel for the example line above would be 11855 When parsing the UTC with this method the channel value can jump when the minutes or hours change 1 e 11859 to 11900 In this case Sx_Int cannot be used because the UTC can be greater than 32767 Another method to parse the UTC is to create individual hours minutes and seconds channels The hours and minutes channels would be configured as Sx_Int with format strings of SGPGGA 2u and SGPGGA 2u 2u respectively Notice that the hours channel parses the first two characters while the minutes channel throws the first two characters away by using the assignment suppress
23. 1 of 16 ina multi drop RS 485 network Rotate the switch so the black dot aligns with the desired previously unassigned address 5 2 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual RS 232 Mode RS 422 RS 485 Mode 5 a p cecama un le E N e Description Common Not Used Not Used T T Not Used Not Used R RE Description SERIAL COM Not Used cael gt RxD Soo o oo0lA wah un y ARAS O TxD IA J Not Used i 6 9 Common DB9 Connector Not Used male RTS CTS Not Used LBK COM 422 485 Option Comparative Pinouts LBK MEM1 U Expanded Memory 16 MB Upgrade The standard 4 MB RAM can be user replaced with a 16 MB board LBK MEM1 U The expanded memory creates a larger data buffer allowing more time to swap PC Cards This is convenient when using fast scan rates Note that the 16 MB memory option can also be installed at the factory LBK MEM1 WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to all system connected devices prior to connecting or disconnecting cables or setting hardware configurations Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death and equipment damage even under low voltage conditions CAUTION Perform the following procedure using ESD tools containers and procedures One or more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Turn off system power Remove LogBook s top cover and locate SIMM socke
24. 15V power sources to operate Typically the LogBook s power supply meets this requirement but if additional power is needed a DBK32A or External P1 Bus DBK33 must be added The LogBook s power supply employs diode protection on its 15V supplies so that no conflict will take place when a DBK32A or DBK33 is added to the P1 bus However adding a DBK33 with its 5V source necessitates the proper positioning of the JP1 and JP2 jumpers Adding a DBK33 to your system with the jumpers set incorrectly can damage your LogBook DBK33 and other system components Refer to the following table for important information regarding configuration CAUTION Adding a DBK33 with its 5V source necessitates the proper positioning of the JP1 and JP2 jumpers on the LogBook 360 P1 interconnect board Adding a DBK33 to your system with the jumpers set incorrectly can damage the LogBook DBK33 and other system components WHEN JP1 AND JP2 JUMPERS ARE IN PLACE A DBK33 CANNOT BE USED IN THE SYSTEM P1 Interconnect Board A for DBK33 Applications P1 Interconnect LogBook 5V Power LogBook 5V Power Source Notes Pertaining to DBK33 Board ania P1 ee P1 When the JP1 jumper is in place and the JP2 jumper is out if the system is using external DBKs the DBK33 will need to be external Internal DBKs will be powered from LogBook s internal P1 bus When the JP1 jumper is out and the JP2 jumper is in place if DBKs are used internally or externally
25. 3 159 Vol DBK4 Fi Setting DBK Parameters in the Analog one Channel el Configuration V Window When configuring DBKs the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window provides a means of setting up all manual hardware settings Once configured the analog and digital channel setup spreadsheets provide a means of setting up channel specific programmable features Some DBKs have hardware settings that must be manually set inside the DBK such as jumpers or DIP switches In these cases the parameter setting in Log View must match the actual hardware Setting one does not automatically set the other in other words you must make configuration settings in both software and hardware when applicable For specific DBK hardware configuration refer to the appropriate section of the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manuals p n 457 0905 Using Multiple Timebases LogBook is capable of storing channels at 4 independent timebases one base rate and 3 rates that are divisions of the base rate Two reasons for using multiple timebases are first to reduce the amount of storage required by saving slow channels at a slow rate acquisition can last longer before filling up the PC Card and second to provide noise reduction by averaging and thus enhance the value of the data 1 Open the Acquisition Configuration window see page LV 42 by clicking the TL lt Acq gt Acquisition Configuration button Acc 2 Inthe scan rate frame at the right of
26. 33 LogBook Configuration verify device name the connection type th t lat a tere d Device Inventory LogBook Properties Test Hardware e protocol a timeout duration an then click Apply pala Device Settings 3 if serial connection Under Port po PE are Device Name Settings tab select baud rate and related parameters and then click Apply A lel Port 4 Verify proper LogBook connection and Device Connection LP power on then under the Test Hardware tab after click the lt Test gt Protocol ECP button Testing will verify system ot parameters and then bench mark system communication performance 5 Launch LogView from your PC unless you set up a shortcut you can find LogView in the Programs group in the Start menu The control window and the Analog Input Channel Configuration window should appear 6 Under the Device menu in the control window click Select LogBook From the drop down list select LogBook you just configured in the hardware tree then click the Attach icon to establish a communications link The lt Upload gt and lt DownLoad gt buttons in the Control Window should now be enabled LogView recognizes when LogBook is attached and enables the applicable tools as seen by their lettering turning from gray to black l a EEx Attach Upload Downlad 7 In LogView s Analog Input Channel Configuration page LV 30 and Acquisition Configuration page LV 42 windows set up the channels and
27. 989592 Software Reference E Analog Input Channel Configuration View Edit el ES Channel Configuration Select input range a 0 0 to al 0 0 Volt o Storage DB i ee SW j ser Scaling 2 Point Cal Beta A o a Chao A i J twee A ote 20 0 Wal e A e1_cHoo P1_CHOO Pal J to 10 0 Volt Local sjh 0 Moo Ma PICHOT P1_CHO1 eRe to 10 0 Volt Local Yes Mo No No o P1 CHO2 P1_CHO2 On 10 0 to10 0 Jvol Local ee tne INE No PI CH03 P1 CHO3 On 5 0 to 5 0 Volt Local Yes No Mo No Selecting Input Range for Channel P1 CH02 eli 4 Click the Digital lt Input gt button Turn all the digital channels Off or On as applicable Input 5 Click the lt Acq gt Acquisition Configuration button or select that submenu from the View pull down menu and the Acquisition Configuration window will appear The 6 From the Acquisition Configuration window select all the parameters that define your desired acquisition Under the Trigger tab select Immediate as the trigger if you want to start the acquisition the moment the system is armed Under the Post Trigger tab select a duration of 1 minute In the Scan Rate frame set Base Rate A to 5 Hz or as applicable by typing in a value and selecting the proper unit T Acquisition Configuration F Infinite Rearms Number of Re arme o Enable Event Mark Enable Time Stamp r Trigger Block Definition 7 Scan Rate an Internal Clock Max
28. Access Memory the 4 or 16 MB SIMM board SRAM Static Random Access Memory ec 2 Error Codes LogBook User s Manual Dimensional Drawings Chassis for Primary Data Acquisition Devices and Optional Modules Note With exception of the 11 x 8 5 x 2 63 category either one of two dimensional drawings could apply to your device depending on the unit s assembly date Legacy chassis have notable grooves on the left and right sides of the enclosure The modern chassis have smooth surfaces Refer to the associated drawing modern or legacy as applicable 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 Category page DD 2 Two drawings provided Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis DaqBook 100 120 112 200 216 DBK1 DBK10 DBK23 DBK24 DBK30A DBK43A DBK50 DBK51 DBK52 DBK53 DBK54 DBK84 DBK203 DBK204 TempBook 66 WaveBook 512 WaveBook 512H WBK10 WBK10H WBK10A WBK14 WBK15 WBK16 WBK17 11 x 8 5 x 1 72 Category page DD 4 Two drawings provided Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis DBK34A DBK70 LogBook 300 WaveBook 512A WaveBook 516 WaveBook 516A DaqBook 2000A 11 x 8 5 x 2 63 Category page DD 6 One drawing provided DaqBook 2000E DaqBook 2000X WBK40 WBK41 WaveBook 516E 11 x 14 x 3 44 Category page DD 7 Two drawings provided Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis DaqBook 260 DBK60 LogBook 360 Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards excludes DBK46 and DBK2
29. Applies to LogBook 360 Only Introduction The LogBook 360 has two serial ports to which RS 232 devices can be attached Using the LogView interface serial data channels can be described that allow the LogBook to collect data from the devices convert them to channel values and store them synchronously with its analog and digital inputs Although the auxiliary serial ports are standard in the LogBook 360 the serial input software is sold separately as option LogBook GPS Use the following authorization code to enable the feature ED7B55484273 LogBook 300 does not support serial device input log View software and LogBook GPS option S a LogBook 360 Serial or parallel N ce es ie o GPS receiver oy ye eee A SA 2 Ee ee a E Notebook PC Qa 4 4 Serial device I LogBook 360 Connected to GPS Receiver and a Serial Device Virtually any serial device that sources continuous ASCII data including Global Positioning System GPS devices gas flow meters and scales is compatible GPS devices conforming to the NMEA 0183 standard are supported directly in the LogView interface so no knowledge of the data format is necessary The GPS receiver must be purchased separately and is available from a variety of sources For ease of operation make sure the receiver complies with the NMEA 0183 protocol standard LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 1 Serial Input Fundamentals Ev
30. C ALOGVIEWSUnttled lwc File View Device Tools Indicators B p ma p y Connection DO PCCard Attach Downid Upload Acquisition Mame Untitled agi Mt n Hry ACH Acquisition Status Idle Log iew CALOGYIEW Untitled Ivc File View Device Tools Indicators Connector O PEcard l Break Gownld Upload Ee y a y hd nue 6 Ei Ter wat Acquisition Status Idle Log View Control Window LogBook Attached Acquisition Mame Untitled Legend 1 New Setup File 8 Stop Acquisition 2 Open Setup File 9 Hardware Configuration 3 Save Setup File 10 Analog Input Setup 4 Break PC from LogBook Shows when PC is attached or 11 Digital Input Setup Attach PC to LogBook Shows when PC is unattache eae o 12 Output I O Setup 5 DownLoad to LogBook Shows when PC is attached or es DownLoad to PC Card Shows when PC is unattached 13 GPS Global Positioning System Serial IN Setup Option 6 UpLoad Acquisition Setup amp Data to LogBook 14 Calculated IN Channel Setup Shows when PC is attached or 15 Acquisition Configuration UpLoad Acquisition Setup amp Data to PC Card Shows when PC is unattached 16 View Data via a post acquisition view application 7 Arm Start Acquisition Spreadsheet Model LogView s interface uses a spreadsheet model of cells in rows and columns see next figure
31. CA 37 x 21n regard to CA 37 x cables the x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected to the primary ae P1 for Analog I O data acquisition device Passive You can connect P1 to DBK Analog DBKs Power DBKs Passive DBKs Power H Analog DBK DBKs Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook 2000 AEX Device via P4 DaqBook 2001 DaqBook 2005 DagOQEM 2001 DagOQEM 2005 and DaqBook 2020 do not have a P4 connector The P4 connection option applies to AEX models only Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 7 P4 connectivity for DaqBook 2000 AEX devices is as follows e One end of a CA 195 cable connects to the DaqBook 2000 AEX device s 100 pin P4 connector Note that the CA 195 cable has two P4 connectors e The other end of the CA 195 cable connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board or adapter module for 00 pin to 37 pin adaptations e g P4 to P1 P2 P3 but not necessarily all three e The DBK200 Series adapter connects to one or more CA 37 x ribbon cables where x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected For example in addition to providing a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device a CA 37 3 cable includes three additional DB37 connectors These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port Use of a CA 37 16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added e The CA 37 x cable connects to expansion DBKs in accordance with port
32. Configuration Selecting Serial COMM and Connection at Fixed Baud 4 Select Connection at Fixed Baud In the resulting Configuration Settings panel select the desired baud rate following figure Do not enter a baud rate value that exceeds the maximum baud rate as specified in your short haul modem s user documentation LogBook Hardware Configuration Configuration Settings LogBook gt Serial COMM E amp LogBook P1 e Analog 10 Connection Connection at Fixed Baud y P2 HL les Digital 10 Baud Rate 57600 y A Data Bits lags Analog IO Le Digital 10 Parity 51 Serial GPS a pee Stop Bits 52 Serial AUX RTS Made Input Buffer Full OK Cancel Adjusting the Baud Rate for the Connection at Fixed Baud Rate Setting Note After this configuration has been downloaded to the LogBook serial communication can be performed through the modems Serial communication can also be made via a direct serial connection between the PC and LogBook as long as the baud rates in the PC and LogBook match Close the LogBook Hardware Configuration window Setup the other acquisition parameters as desired After the configuration is complete download it to a PC Card The download can be done in either of two ways a with the PC Card in the PC s socket or b with the PC Card in a LogBook through a parallel port connection 958896 Using Mod
33. DB 9 male serial port option connects to a Global Positioning System LogBook 360 only This DB 9 male serial port option connects to optional auxiliary devices Provides 16 analog input channels 3 TTL inputs and various signals for driving expansion cards Provides 3 8 bit TTL programmable I O ports and external interrupt input Provides 4 16 bit counters 4 analog outputs and 16 high speed digital I O Door provides access to PCMCIA connector for removable PC Card memory devices LED lights when power is applied to LogBook and the power switch is depressed into the ON position LED lights steady ON when a routine error occurs e g disk full LED flashes for fatal errors refer to Hardware Errors near the end of the manual No data can be acquired until the error is cleared LED lights after trigger event and during an A D scan sequence LED lights to show that LogBook is ready to begin a scan at the next trigger event LED lights when it is safe to swap PC Cards LogBooks can be left unattended for long testing periods and used in environments not suitable for PCs With the use of PC Cards one PC can support several LogBooks Other LogBook features include Onboard processor capable of real time data reduction and system control in stand alone mode Non volatile storage of configuration files and samples via removable transportable PC Cards 4 MB RAM onboard expandable to 16 MB 100 kHz 16 bit Analog to Digital Conversion 8 diff
34. DOF uE dasylab E MATLAB DSC matlab A Fost iew Binary JT JOE oostview O Snap Master Binary SMA DAT em Automatically delete source data file after conversion Cancel Overnaniting Existing Files On Conversion f Validate overwriting of each existing file C Overwrite all existing files without validation C Do not overnite any existing files File Converter Preferences Dialog Box LV 46 LogView 989592 Software Reference Device Menu The Device menu allows you to choose devices in your system attach or break connection to the system and to start and stop an acquisition Select PC Card Drive Select Select PC Card allows you to choose which drive PC Card on your computer you wish to make active for PC Card Drive l uploading and downloading especially relevant if no toolbar icon your computer has more than one PC Card slot coal a Cancel Select PC Card Sel Select LogBook allows you to choose devices from MAE E Aaa lO elect your system and then verify or change the LogBook communication port settings Device Port Settings Communiction Port COM no toolbar icon Interrupt request Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control kon soft Attach OR Cancel Select LogBook Le Attach allows you to establish connection with a LogBook If no LogBook is connected LogView will atach automatically attach to a PC Card in the u
35. DaqBoard 2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard 2000 Series boards have 100 pin connectors designated as P4 The 100 pins correlate to various pins on P1 P2 and P3 DB37 connectors Connectivity in the system is as follows see figure e Both the DaqBoard 2000 and 2000c Series board connect to a CA 195 cable The cable has two 100 pin P4 connectors e The CA 195 connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board or adapter module for 100 pin to 37 pin adaptations e g P4 to P1 P2 P3 but not necessarily all three e The DBK200 Series adapter connects to a CA 37 x ribbon cable where x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected For example in addition to providing a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device a CA 37 3 cable includes three additional DB37 connectors These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port Use of a CA 37 16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added e The CA 37 x cable connects to expansion DBKs in accordance with port type For example Analog DBKs to port P1 Digital DBKs to port P2 and passive DBKs to port P3 DaqBoard 2000 Series Boards plug into a PCI bus Compact cPCI DaqBoard 2000c Series boards plug into a compact PCI bus in compact PCs DaqBoard 2000 Series Board P2 for Digital 1 O You can connect P2 to e Digital DBKs e Passive DBKs beveeveusesdussuudieuuducewe P3 for Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital 1 O You can connect
36. Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration spreadsheet Also four pulse input ports can count pulses for summing and or frequency measurement Adding digital expansion cards provides up to 192 digital bits Input LogBook Hardware Configuration Al ES Configuration Settings LogBook gt P2 gt Digital 10 Port_4 E Logbook F BLE Analog 10 Made lnmut H E Po EE le Digital 10 Control Resolution Individual bits o Pot A Individual bits Single port of bits re Analog I0 U gt Digital 10 Serial Communication Port D Cancel Configuring Digital I O Port A as Input and with Control Resolution as Individual Bits eT Input a Digital amp Counter Input Channel Configuration Edit Channel Configuration Enter channel label P2_Port_a_0 Ph Ch User Label OnO Readi Foma Channel Sample Rate nee Peical Channe set Labe j eading oma Type Es MAA P2 Pot AO P2 Pot A 0 Local P2 Porta 1 P2 Port 1 Local P Porta 2 P Porta 2 Local P2 Port_A_3 P2 Port_A_3 Local P2 Porta 4 P2 Porta 4 Local DE P2 Porta 5 P2 Porta 5 Local P2 Porta 6 P2 Porta 6 Local BP Port A 7 P2 Porta 7 Local o channel label 16 characters maximum Type in desired label or leave default Digital amp Counter Input Channel Configuration Screen Channels Configured for Individual Bits LV 34 LogView 989592 Software Reference A Digital amp Counter Input Channel Configuration Of x
37. Disable Disable Sool Ear stare a al Authorization Dialog Box The Exit command closes Log View Log View can also be closed by selecting the X button at the top right of the Control Window If entered data has not been downloaded saved a dialog box will appear with such a message Authorization features Exit LV 28 LogView 989592 Software Reference View Menu The View menu includes configuration windows most of them in the spreadsheet format Descriptions of the View pull down menu s selections follow Selecting Hardware Configuration brings up the windows shown below As you progress Hardware through the hardware tree the window will prompt you for related information as needed All 3 Configuration I O ports P1 P2 P3 are set up here meon Note these windows only set up non programmable parameters to match corresponding hardware oat settings LogView cannot know these settings unless you enter them here Some DBKs have programmable settings that must be set under the DBK Parameters tab of the Analog Input Channel Configuration window Zu LogB ook Hardware Configuration Configuration Settings e ee LogBook gt P1 gt Analog 10 Analog IO Mode This figure shows user Le Digital 10 Dit ENS selecting the differential E P3 mode of analog input on ES Analog I0 P1 l Digital 10 DK Cancel LogBook Hardware Configuration Iof ES lt
38. Discards current operation and restores previous state as last saved Start Stop Starts an acquisition from idle or stops an on going acquisition Numeric keypad Allows entry of signed decimal numbers for setting various parameters Manual Trigger Generates a manual trigger to begin a scan sequence Event Mark Generates an event marker LogBook records the exact time to the nearest scan at which the operator presses the Event Mark button These marks can be viewed on a PC with the use of a view program such as eZ PostView 5 6 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual LBK1 Menu Map The following table describes the LBK1 menus that become available via the soft keys below the LCD display panel In general you can scroll through menu parameters by using the Select up Select down keys and through parameter values by using the Edit left Edit right keys Selections are finalized by using the Enter key selections are discarded by using the Cancel key or by selecting another parameter LBK1 Menu Map Menu ID Name Type Description Fields and Parameters Opening screen with soft key options for System Time reports time registered by LogBook s internal timer other menus on the bottom line Other Acquisition Status status can be idle armed or triggered screens can return here by selecting Main Menu at bottom right corner Acq Acquisition Configuration Conf Read Only Shows settings from Lo
39. Guide Qs300 7 Acquisition Configuration An acquisition is configured using LogView on a PC and then stored as an acquisition setup file on a PC Card The PC Card may be in an attached LogBook 300 or in the PC to be later manually transferred to an unattached LogBook 300 The system s DBK cards are listed the scan sequence is defined the trigger conditions are specified etc Q Reference Note Configuring the acquisition is described in the LogView section of the LogBook User s Manual PDF which is included on the Data Acquisition CD and on our web site A Note about Calibration QS300 8 Calibration is typically performed automatically through Log View software however some DBKs may require manual calibration LogView s 2 point calibration fine tunes the reading s slope and offset error mx b DBKs working with non linear sensors typically condition convert the reading to a linear form Otherwise a non linear analog input signal is difficult to read accurately Careful use of the calculated channels may yield usable approximations in simple limited range conditions Q Reference Notes e An example of 2 point calibration is provided under the Procedures heading in the LogView section of the manual e For information on calibrating the DBK16 and the DBK43A refer to the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Before you get started
40. Ignore UTC Latitude N S character Longitude convert E W character The value will be recorded as decimal equivalent of the ASCII E XX decimal or W XX decimal ip If the serial input data is in fixed length format the format string can be simplified by throwing a number of characters away rather than whole fields For example the Longitude Hemisphere could be parsed using a format string of GPGGA 31c c LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 11 Using Serial Channels in Calculated Channels Calculated channels and the LogBook s ability to use them to define trigger and stop events is a very powerful feature This feature extends to the serial channels which provide time of day data plus information from GPS and general serial devices Example Application 1 An RS 232 scale is being used to measure the weight of a liquid fuel while a thermocouple measures engine temperature The LogBook is to trigger when the temperature exceeds 200F OR when fuel weight is less than 30Kg This is represented by the calculation function seen in the following figure where P1_CH00_2 gt 200 Or SER_CH00 lt 30 The calculated channel shown yields a Calculated Channel Configuration true false output that is both recorded and used as the trigger source AM as CALC_Of On P1_CHOO_2 gt 200 Or SER_CHOO lt 30 Acquisition Configuration Example Application 2 An oven i
41. Indicators Select PC Card A L Select Logbook Select LogBook Device LogB ook Attach aan Break anir Hy l Annee Mattar Accu Protocol Stop acquisition i Int t t Log engihy Marta Se EPPIGieT Baud Rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control lA ardware To change these port settings go to LagBook Configuration in Windows Control Panel Attach OF Cancel Selecting a LogBook from LogView s Device Pull down Menu 3 Establish the connection by clicking the lt Attach gt button at the bottom of the Select LogBook screen At this point LogView will attempt to dial out and connect to the remote LogBook If you are close to the remote LogBook you should be able to see the LogBook s local modem provide feedback indicating that it is being called Soon after the LogBook s local modem should pick up the call Once the communication link has been established the LogView screen will provide additional feedback 7 14 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual What is the Upload Scheduler and how is it used The Upload Scheduler is an independent application that allows the user to configure upload events on one or more LogBooks To avoid waiting for a lengthy upload to complete the Scheduler can be configured to perform the upload during off hours For example three upload events could be configured in the Scheduler each
42. Log View automatically computes the Cal Offset factor near 0 and Cal Scale factor near 1 From this point on Log View automatically applies the y mx b equation to the incoming reading resulting in a calibrated reading 2 pt Calibration based on y mx b 190 y desired value calibrated m Cal Scale slope Ay Ax Ibs x raw actual reading uncalibrated desired b Cal Offset calibrated If actP1 reads 2 0 when setP1 is O reading and actP2 reads 95 0 when setP2 is 100 LogView computes Cal Scale setP1 m Ay Ax 100 0 95 2 1 075 Offset LogView computes Cal Offset lbs read actual b y mx 0 1 075 x 2 2 15 Using Digital Outputs As Alarms Using Log View s calculated channel capability see page LV 36 digital outputs can be stimulated by events such as signal levels in analog inputs e g to sound an alarm at a rising temperature before a test system over heats 1 Click the Analog lt Input gt button to activate the Analog Input Channel Configuration Ny window fa 2 Turn on the analog input channel that you d like to use to stimulate a digital output channel 3 Click the lt Calc gt Calculated Channel button to open the Calculated Channel y te Configuration window 4 Click the lt Add New Channel gt button located just right of the F x button or select Add New Channel from the Edit pull down menu to activate the first or next calculated channel 5 In the Calculated
43. LogBook and another for connecting the card or module Pinouts for P1 P2 and P3 are included in the System Expansion chapter CAUTION For analog signal inputs via P1 do not exceed 35 VDC or 45 VDC Exceeding these limits could result in equipment damage 3 Connect DBK s to transducer s Follow instructions for the specific DBK s as described in the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual as well as instructions for the applicable transducers 4 Connect the LogBook 300 to a suitable power source such as the included AC to DC adapter or the optional DBK34A DC power sources such as a car batteries must supply 10 to 45 VDC RTN 3 P Supply and use the correct DINS pinout see figure A locking DINS No5NO 4 Supply connector assures a secure power connection for applications even RTN subject to vibration or thermal stress DINS power input connector socket as seen on LogBook s front panel 5 Optional Just one cable connects between the LBK1 via RJ 11 connector and the LogBook 300 via a DB9 connector The standard cable is 6 feet long An optional 25 foot cable is available See chapter 5 of the LogBook User s Manual PDF for details regarding the installation of LBK1 Hardware Configuration Reference Note Refer to the device specific sections of the LBK Options chapter of the user s manual and to the DBK Options Manual PDFs for information regarding these devices Note that certain DBK options require ma
44. Modems User s Manual is at the time of this writing shipped with HopNet 10 Series devices Be sure to read that document before proceeding with this appendix Note that HopNet devices and the associated user s manual are properties of Cirronet Inc Additional information can be found at their web site www cirronet com Hardware Setup Required Equipment e Logbook 300 or LogBook 360 with a PCMCIA Card Type I II or HI hard disk card or ATA flash memory solid state card e Parallel Port Cable for use in setup configuration e Two CA 212 Serial cables 9 pin to 9 pin for continuous modem use e One CA 47 PC AT XT Serial Port to RS 232 422 Cable for testing serial connection baud rate Temporary use e Two HopNet Modems one Base and one Remote to provide an extended serial communication system Physical Setup of Hardware This supplement is not a substitute for the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual nor does it duplicate the hardware setup information that has been created by Cirronet Inc You will need to set up your hardware in accordance with the Cirronet document After doing so configure the LogBook for modem serial communication according to the following section Configuration via LogBook Software Reference Note Refer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual for hardware related details regarding HopNet devices Additional information can be found at www cirronet com LogBoo
45. New Folder List ha h E drives and folders directories A no toolbar icon Save Log iew Configuration As Logview E fal e co i Details SS Y AE Y List of existing folders and files in selected folder Press to a save when i i all fields are 7 5 correct lve file LYC A WEEL o a E Cancel Press to F as cancel Enter your file name here Files are saved in txt format operation Upload The Upload command uses LogView s Explorer to get data files from a PC Card The PC Card can reside in LogBook if LogBook is attached to the PC or in the PC s card slot 1f the PC Card was manually transferred from a remote LogBook LLEGA Note The Upload icon and the Explorer item in the Device menu can upload from both LogBook ob or the PC s card slot in either case the icon looks slightly different as shown at left When the lt Upload gt button 1s clicked e If only 1 acquisition file inactive resides on the PC Card all that data is uploaded to the PC s hard drive e If more than 1 acquisition file resides on the PC Card an exploring window will appear and allow you to select which acquisition files or trigger blocks you may wish to upload e attached mode only If the only acquisition file on the PC Card is active all acquired data will be uploaded To prevent duplication of records and conserve storage space data already uploaded is then deleted from the PC Card Software Refer
46. P3 to e Passive DBKs Only Passive DBK PT lr fa ye E DBK201 Passive DBK Several other DBK200 Series P4 to DB37 adapter options can be used in place of DBK201 Digital DBK CA 37 x 21n regard to CA 37 x cables the x indicates the number of JH expansion devices that can be connected to the primary data acquisition device P1 for Analog I O You can connect P1 to Passive iia OAK e Analog S DBK e Power DBKs e Passive DBKs Power Analog DBK DBKs Connecting DBKs to a DaqBoard 2000 Series Board DaqBoard 2003 and cPCI DaqBoard 2003c are exceptions to the above connectivity method The 2003 board typically connects directly to a DBK205 P4 to Screw Terminal Adapter as discussed in the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 Note DaqBook 2000 Series Devices which are discussed in the following section can also connect to DBKs via a P4 connector as indicated in the above figure po 4 DBK Basics 96798 Dag Systems Connecting DBKs to DaqBook 2000 Series Devices Several products make use of the DaqBook 2000 nomenclature However they do not all offer the same connection options Refer to pinouts for the specific devices as needed Connects to DBK Expansions via DaqBook 2001 and 2005 37 pin connectors P1 P2 and P3 There is no P4 DaqBook 2020 37 pin connectors P1 and P2 There is no P3 or P4 Daq Systems DaqOEM 2001 and 2005 40
47. Series device DB37 type port P2 for Digital I O You can connect P2 to Digital DBKs Passive DEKS P1 for Analog I O You can connect P1 to Analog DBKs Power DBKs Passive DBKs DET 1070 440010 Series Device y Pi P3 for Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O CA 37 x You can connect P3 to Y Wy i Passive DBKs Only NT f l in regard to CA 37 x cables the x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected to the primary data acquisition device He i EA AA ee Power Analog Passive Digital Passive DBK DBKs DBKs DBK DBK Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook 2000 Series Device via P1 P2 and P3 The P4 connector on a DaqBook 2000 AEX device shares signal connections with the P1 P2 and P3 connectors P4 offers no additional I O Connecting a DBK200 Series Option to P4 via a CA 195 cable distances the P1 P2 P3 connection from the DaqBook 2000 Series device It does not provide any new signal I O See the following Caution Signal conflicts between a DaqBook 2000 AEX device s P1 P2 P3 connectors and its P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage Therefore when connections have been made to P1 P2 and or P3 use caution when making connections through P4 and visa versa The following pinouts indicate the P1 P2 and P3 pins and their P4 equivalents Use the pinouts to avoid making du
48. Software Installation QS360 1 verify that you have the following items Setting Up the Card Drawer QS360 3 e LogBook 300 Connecting the LogBook 360 to the PC e TR 40U Power Supply External DBKs and Power QS360 6 e Serial Parallel Patch Cable or PC Card Reader Hardware Configuration QS360 7 e PC with ECP Enhanced Capabilities Port LogBook 360 Device Configuration QS360 8 e Data Acquisition CD Testing the Hardware Qs360 10 e Monitor SVGA 1024 x 768 screen resolution Acquisition Configuration QS360 10 e Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP users A Note About Calibration QS360 11 PC with Intel Pentium or equivalent 1 GHz 512 MB memory 10 GB disk space e Windows Vista users PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready gt gt IMPORTANT Software must be installed first Software Installation Remove previous version drivers if present You can do this through Microsoft s Add Remove Programs 1 Close all running applications on the host PC 2 feature 3 Insert the Data Acquisition CD 8 1 2 or higher into your CD ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto run An Opening Screen will appear If AutoRun is disabled a right click Windows Start menu b select Explore and c double click MasterSetup exe As an alternative to using the CD you can download software from www mecdaq com products software aspx 4 Click the lt ENTER SETUP gt button Note If you are downloading s
49. Source channels can be chosen from an analog input for an analog output for from a digital input for a digital output ESA AA E Aa ES Edit Channel Configuration Enter channel label P3_TimerDivisarl Physical Channel User Label Source Initial Units Channel Value Type F3 TimerDivisorl Timer Port P2 Port_4 De Local HY PS TimerDivisorl F TimerDivizorl P2 Port E le Local a channel label 16 characters masimum Type in desired label or leave default Output Channel Configuration Window Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 35 The physical Channel column identifies the hardware channel assignment The User Label column allows you to enter a more suitable channel name of up to 32 characters The Source column designates the input or calculated channel used as the source of data for this output channel An entry of None disables the output channels The Initial Value column allows you to initialize the output to a specified value The Units column indicates units for Initial Value This column can not be edited The default is Decimal Serial GPS Channels LogBook 360 Only GPS LogBook 360 can store latitude longitude and altitude coordinates along with the analog and digital data from the attached transducers providing it is connected to a Global Positioning System GPS receiver LogView software provides an easy method for setting up the GPS channels No programming character string parsing or protocol
50. Storage tab note that the newly configured sample rates are enabled The sample rate columns determine the rate at which each channel s data will be stored Each enabled On channel can have data stored at sample rates A B C D or a combination there of see following figure A Analog Input Channel Configuration View Edi Channel Configuration Collect data at rate C Bo Storage DBE Parameters User Scaling Pomt Cal Physical Channel DEJ onus o mo em om mth a ES EES 1 CH00_0_0 P1_CHO0_0_0 On 3 159 to 3159 Volt DBKA 21 cHo0_0 1 P1_CHO0_0 1 On 1 579 to 1 579 Vok DEK4 P1_CH00_1_0 P1_CH00_1_0 On 3 159t0 3 159 Vol DBKA V4 P1_cHo0_1_1 P1_CH00_1_1 On 0 079 to 0 079 Volt DBK4 Setting Sample Rates for Data Storage Each enabled channel can be assigned up to four rates 7 Set the cells in these four columns to Yes or No as desired for all enabled On channels Channels shown as Off are not sampled 8 Once configured download the acquisition setup file and initiate data collection Using Digital 2 Point Calibration Remote LogBooks can not be calibrated 2 point calibration can only be performed when LogBook is attached to the PC via a communication interface 2 point calibration allows you to mathematically trim out inaccuracies in the measurement equipment and or the transducer By allowing the equipment to measure 2 known points in the measurement range LogBook ca
51. Sx in the table represents serial ports Sl or S2 Conversion Type Description Required Value Range Specifier Channel Type o e a a A ee A O a eitereorfformas Sx Float BE H 38 7 digits optional signed octal hexadecimal or decimal 32 768 to 32 767 integer po ctainteger SK It 32 768 10 32 767 O pS string rejectonlyy NANA i unsigned decimal integer SxInt 5535 PX hexadecimalinteger 0 SK Int 32 768 10 32 767 N A N A GPS Examples The following block of characters is an example of typical GPS receiver data SGPRMC 011855 V 4022 1990 N 08249 1990 W 000 0 000 0 7150470 006 7 W 6C GPGGA 011855 4022 1990 N 08249 1990 W 0 00 5 M M 77 44 JE AG LEG O Le SGPGSV 377 2 pl 2 00 000 797 147 00 0007 157 000007 167007000 7D SGPGGV 37274 27 7 00 000 718700 000 19 00 00077207 004000778 SEP ES VE 3737 02 21 00 000 77 227 00 0004 23 00 000 4 247 007 000 7m The following example demonstrates how to retrieve information from the first few fields of the Global Positioning System Fix Data GGA line SGPGGA 011855 4022 1990 N 08249 1990 W 0 00 M M 44 Field Name Field Description Address Field aaccc where aa is the talker identifier mnemonic GP for Global Positioning System and ccc is the sentence formatter mnemonic GGA for Global Positioning System Fix Data Universal Time Coordinated UTC hhmmss ss where hh is hours 0 to 23 mm is minutes
52. This transformer rectifier type power Hz to 60 Hz and converts it to the 15 VDC required by the DBK DBK Description DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card DBK33 DBK42 DBK70 supply receives power from a 110 to 125 VAC source at 60 Hz and converts it to the 15 VDC required The DINS is the system s basic power connector see the following figure The CA 115 is a 6 1n cable with a plug male DINS connector on both ends The CA 115 is used to connect DBK32As or DBK33s in parallel when they are to be powered by the same power supply Triple Output Power Supply Card 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module Vehicle Network Interface Power Output Connector Male connector located on the power supply cable and on both ends of the CA 115 cable Power Input Connector Female connector located on the device being powered DaqBook DBK32A DBK33 see Notes 1 and 2 DINS Power Out DINS Power Connectors On a DBK34 and DBK34A Note 1 DIN5 connectors for LogBook DBK34 and DBK34A have threaded retaining rings Note 2 In regard to the above pinout for the DBK34 and DBK34A Power Out DIN5 connector the 28 V pin is only active when the device is in the 28 VDC mode however the 14 V pin is active regardless of the mode selected pg 14 DBK Basics 967794 Daq Systems An Introduction to Power Related DBKs The power related DBK options are the DBK30A DBK32A DBK33 DBK34 and DBK34A From the standpoint of provi
53. V high Trigger to A D Latency 10 us max LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 15 Sequencer Randomly programmable for channel and gain and for unipolar bipolar where applicable Depth 1024 analog channels plus 128 digital channels Channel to Channel Rate 10 us channel fixed General Purpose Digital I O 24 I O channels expandable up to 192 Connector DB37 male P2 Device 82C55 Maximum Input and Update Rate 100 kHz Output Voltage Levels Minimum 1 Voltage 3 0 2 5 mA sourcing Maximum 0 Voltage 0 4 2 5 mA sinking High Speed Digital I O Channels 16 input lines Connector DB37 male P3 Maximum Sampling Rate 100K words s Frequency Pulse Counter Channels 4 16 bits per channel cascadeable Connector DBK37 male P3 Maximum Pulse Count 32 bit binary 2 channels cascaded Maximum Input Rate 1 MHz Input Voltage 15 to 15 V Frequency Pulse Generator Channels 2 16 bits per channel Connector DB37 male P3 Frequency Pulse Generating Mode Input frequency divided by 1 to 65 535 Input Low Voltage 0 8 V max Input High Voltage 2 0 V min 1 16 An Introduction to LogBook Maximum Rep Rate 100 kHz Minimum Rep Rate 10 hours Expansion Channel Sample Rate Same as on board channels 10 us channel Output Current Maximum Source Current 2 5 mA Maximum Sink Current 2 5 mA Input Voltage Levels Minimum Required 1 Voltage Level 2 0 V Maximum Allowed 0 Voltage L
54. calibrated readings 2 points of known set value must be compared with 2 sensor actual readings For example to calibrate a strain gage scale unload the scale type 0 0 into the Set P1 column then click the Get P1 lt Execute gt button to read the actual sensor value 2 0 Place a known 100 lb weight on the scale type 100 into the Set P2 column then click the Get P2 lt Execute gt button to read the actual sensor value 95 0 LogView automatically computes the Cal Offset factor near 0 and Cal Scale factor near 1 From now on LogView automatically applies the y mx b calculation to the incoming reading to produce the calibrated reading fb A actP2 Y e 2 pt Calibration based on y mx b 4eatP2 y desired value calibrated m Cal Scale slope Ay Ax Ibs Ad x raw actual reading uncalibrated desired de b Cal Offset calibrated If actP1 reads 2 0 when setP1 is 0 reading de LE and actP2 reads 95 0 when setP2 is 100 tf LogView computes Cal Scale m Ay Ax 100 0 95 2 1 075 Offset actP1 100 LogView computes Cal Offset Ibs read actual b y mx 0 1 075 x 2 2 15 Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 33 Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration ei The basic LogBook system has three 8 bit digital ports and one high speed 16 bit port configurable as inputs or outputs in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window see following figure When configured as inputs these ports appear in the
55. center of the toolbar locks this window on top of other windows until you unlock it by selecting the pushpin again Meters Configuration Software Reference The toolbars and pull down menus for the three meter types are identical except that Digital Meters does not have a Reset Peak Hold icon a LOGYIEW Analog Meters Control View Meters Toolbar Icons Start Starts meters Reset Peak Hold Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly adjust to Indicator indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters Stay On Do Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows Push pin a Sends the meter s display image to connected printer Rows x Columns Opens a small menu with row x column arrangement options Example When the number of meters is 6 the grid options will be 6x1 3x2 2x3 and 2x4 with the first number being the number of rows If you then select 3x2 you will have 3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row q eee Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen Up to 32 meters can be selected The meters windows each have a Control and View pull down menu as indicated by the following figure These menu items correspond to the toolbar icons described above Start w lsa Stop 2x2 3x1 3 Reset Peak Hold en stay Un Top d Print 16 32 Custom
56. data can be reduced by block averaging or by decimation skipping samples without averaging Then data is placed onto the DOS compatible disk drive using a proprietary format in a DOS compatible file The acquisition setup name and a time stamp are also written to disk Post processing programs can thereby correctly interpret the related data The PC can retrieve the acquired data through the serial or parallel port during or after the acquisition Upon command from the PC LogBook can switch to storing data into a new file After the PC retrieves data from the first file it can erase that file and reuse the space Note Data is never erased without a specific command from the PC Data can also be retrieved from a PC Card LogBook copies enough information from the old card to the new replacement card to make sure the current acquisition can continue on the replacement PC Card nel Replacement PC Cards for use with LogBook must be pre configured in order to store Y acquisition data LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 13 1 14 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual LogBook Specif ications Specifications are subject to change without notice General Supply Voltage Range 10 to 45 0 VDC LogBook 300 Power Consumption 0 9 A 15 VDC Size 8 x 11 x 1 in 216 x 279 x 44 mm Operating Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 C to 60 C Weight 3 3 lb 1 5 kg Storage Temperature 40 to 176 F
57. decoding is necessary LogBook 360 can provide direct support for any GPS receiver that conforms to the NMEA 0183 protocol standard GPS support is not provided for LogBook 300 GPS receivers must be purchased separately and are available from a variety of sources If purchasing a GPS make sure it conforms to the NMEA 0183 protocol standard LogBook Hardware Configuration ojx Configuration Settings LogBook gt 51 Serial GPS 4800 bei E LogBook 2 69 P1 EHe Analog 10 Baud Rate E P2 E les Digital 10 Data Bits 8 y E 5 Mieco Parity None y co Analog 10 Wes Digital 10 Stop Bits 6 S1 Serial GPS 52 Serial AUX Serial COMM RTS Mode Input Buffer Full tei OK Cancel LogBook Hardware Configuration Reference Note Refer to chapter 6 GPS amp Serial Device Data Collection for detailed information Calculated Channel Configuration fy Calc LV 36 LogView LogBook can derive virtual channels from real and or virtual channels using math operators and functions The resulting virtual channels can be used to e Create alarms based on any combination of signal levels from real channels and logical or mathematical functions of virtual channels e Reduce data through statistical operations comparisons etc e Develop sophisticated trigger equations using a series of averaging comparing of other real and virtual channels e Man
58. details This default opening window has more parameter columns than will fit in view at one time Therefore the left most white columns are shown in every view these parameters include Physical Channel User Label On Off Reading Range Units and Channel Type The right most shaded columns vary depending on which folder tab is selected Each tab Storage DBK Parameters User Scaling and 2 Point Calibration has tab specific parameters e Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration see page LV 34 LogBook has three 8 bit digital ports and one high speed 16 bit port configurable as inputs or outputs Digital expansion cards can provide up to 192 digital bits There are also 4 pulse input ports that can count pulses for summing and or frequency measurement e Output Channels Configuration see page LV 35 This window shows all the currently available digital and analog output channels Each output channel is fed by a user set source channel Source channels can be chosen from any of the input hardware channels or calculated virtual channels e Calculated Channel Configuration see page LV 36 Log View can derive virtual channels using standard math operators and functions lt gt min max etc Virtual channels can be used to create alarms reduce data statistically develop sophisticated trigger equations and manipulate input channel values for more useful output including simple control systems Help Box The bot
59. expected values The software automatically calculates and applies the necessary correction factors Storage DBK Parameters User Scaling 2 Point Cal seit 2 Point Calibration Fa Pi CHOO P1_CHOD On 0 1 to 500 1 AZP CHOI P1_CHO1 On 0 0 to 2000 0 a F3 P1 CH02 P1_CH02 On 10 0 to 10 0 Volt The above figure shows the columns in the 2 Point Calibration tab To fine tune the accuracy of the value coming from a linear sensor LogView provides both 1 and 2 point calibration e One point calibration can be used to zero a channel such as a thermocouple channel which is usually more accurate in scale than offset One example of one point calibration is that of placing a thermocouple in an ice bath and setting the 0 C point and no other e 2 point calibration determines the scale and offset factors to convert the raw readings into accurate calibrated readings Two points of known set values must be compared with two actual sensor readings An example of 2 Point Calibration via Log View Software To calibrate a strain gage scale 1 Unload the scale 2 Enter a value of 0 0 into the Set P1 column 3 Click the Get P1 lt Execute gt button This lets you read the actual sensor value 2 0 in the example 4 Place a 100 lb weight on the scale 5 Enter a value of 100 into the Set P2 column Click the Get P2 lt Execute gt button This lets you read the actual sensor value 95 0 in the example 989592 Software Reference
60. for DBK32A 33 Star Washer Power Card f Screw Shield Plate Side View Support Tab DEK41 Rear Panel BNC Connectors for CE Compliance Exposed BNC connectors can receive static charges which can enter the board s circuitry resulting in ESD damage To comply with CE standards BNC connectors must be shielded from high voltage sources such as static charges Shielded BNC Connector Dust Cap Some points e Cable and connector requirements are stated in the product s Declaration of Conformity These are typically special coaxial cables with insulated end connectors and rubber O rings for example cable kit p n 418 0800 e PVC dust caps p n CN 96 must cover all unused BNC connectors e Properly installed connectors and dust caps will cover the entire surface of the BNC 1 e no BNC metal will be exposed 8 4 CE Compliance 949297 LogBook User s Manual LogView Software Reference Authorization Code ED B55484273 Understanding LogView LV 1 View Menu LV 29 Modes of LogView Operation LV 2 Hardware Configuration LV 29 Setup LV 2 Analog Input Channel Configuration LV 30 Monitor LV 2 Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration LV 34 System Management LV 3 Communication LV 3 LogView Features and Capabilities LV 4 Software User Interface LV 5 Control Window Toolbar and Pull Down Menus LV 5 Output Channels Configuration
61. for an upload of data at a different hour when the equipment is unattended The Upload Scheduler can save valuable time by performing such uploads especially in cases where modem connected LogBooks are operating at slow baud rates If the Upload Scheduler is disabled you must enter a valid authorization code as follows Open LogView From LogView s Control Window select the File Pull Down menu Select Authorization The LogView Authorization dialog box appears Enter ED7B55484273 to enable the Upload Scheduler Modem Support and GPS Support will also be enabled a a Modem Support Disable Upload Scheduler Disable GPS Support Disable aoo Porja Sra frl LogView Authorization Dialog Box For applications that require continuous data collection the Upload Scheduler can periodically upload the data to a local PC making space on the LogBook s PC Card memory for more data For a continuous acquisition each upload creates a new file called a data segment LogView contains a utility to merge segments or to concatenate link them in one continuous file Merging and concatenating are discussed in the Log View section of this manual LogYiew Scheduler Untitled lvs Al ES Schedule Event Upload Start Upload Stop Upload Fred Last Run Time Retry Mut 1 Tran 110 Zoom 03719 1999 1 00 00 AM 09191399 12 00 00 AM Daily 0372071999 1 00 00 AM 03719 1999 1 00 00 Ai 20 2 Tran 129 Zoorn 03 19 1999 2 00 00 AM 0911
62. four tabs to group analog input parameters Always visible are the Physical Channel User Label On Off real time Reading Range Units and Channel Type columns Clicking a tab exposes one of the four sub windows of parameters including Storage DBK Parameters User Scaling or 2 Point Calibration If beneficial adjust column width by placing the cursor on the line between columns in the column header and drag the line left or right as needed for example to enter a more descriptive user label Software Reference i Analog Input Channel Configuration al ES Mew Edit Channel Configuration Storage DBE Parameters User Scaling Point Cal Physical User Label On Off Readin Range Unita Channel Sample Rates alias g Chore i El EN A Pei CHo P1_CHOO 10 0 to 10 0 Local Ses Mo Noe JNO P1_CHO0 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes 11 nie Mig PY CHO2 P1 CHO2 10 0 to 10 0 Local Wes Mo No Mi P1 CHO3 P1_CHO3 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Ho Mo Mo P1_CHD4 P1_CHDA 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Mo N gt No FE P1 CHOS P1_CHOS 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Mo No Nos PI CHOG P1 CHOG 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Mo Mo Mo eye CHo P1_CHO 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Ma Na 2 Neo eye cH P1 CHOS 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes Mo Mo Mo P1 _CH09S P1_CHOS 10 0 to 10 0 Local ves Ho Naan PI CH10 P1_CH10 10 0 to 10 0 Local Yes No No Nos PI_CH11 P1_CH11 10 0 to 10 0 Local__ Yes No No No Physical analog input point
63. mathematical functions with initiate a manual trigger and to mark events virtual channels Display channel values numerically Any measured input Run LogView channel may be displayed in real time during acquisitions Internally store data Any enabled displayable channel may be displayed if the acquisition is halted Monitor disk status showing what percentage of the disk is full Set LogBook time 5 4 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual LBK1 Installation System Connection 1 Connect the supplied cable s DB9P IS connector to the LogBook s DB9S lt gt connector and tighten the locking gt screws On LogBook 300 the connector is i K labeled FROM CONTROLLER BAC Rut LBK1 gt Ms i Remote LogBook Ly On LogBook 360 the connector is Terminal optional labeled TERMINAL TO LBK1 A LogBook 2 Connect the cable s RJ 11 connector e KA IA to the LBK1 s corresponding socket D ae a i Sp DB9 IDA DA 0 irp 3 o On o AD e Optional 6 ft retractable cable shown y SY LBKI with Early Style LogBook 300 Mounting Rack An optional mounting rack p n Mountl can be used lt gt to hold the LBK1 securely to the LogBook For EZ gt convenience you can mount the LBK1 length wise or k width wise on the rack see figure x 1 Mount LBK1 on the rack in the desired 7 orientation and attach 2 screws through the E rack to the LBK1 A i 2 Mount rack onto the LogBook and att
64. no digital output rows are present click the nu lt H W gt Hardware Configuration button in the main toolbar and add a few digital I O ports as outputs e g the LBK2 DAC on the P3 port a Output E Output Channel Configuration la x Edit m Channel Configuration Select control source B _CHOO_ 00 Physical Initial Channel EJ adi 3DAC_0 P3DACO P1 CHOO 0 Ofo0 Volt LBK_DAC a P3 DAC1 P3 DAC1 P1 CH000_0 0 0 Wolt LBK_DAC P3 DAC_2 P3 DAC_2 None Wolt LBK_DAC The data source for the output channel Select the data source from the drop down list or double click for the next choice Selecting a Control Source 9 Select an output port then set its Source to the calculated channel that we just configured Unless you changed the label in the Calculated Channel grid the source will be CALC_00 10 Once configured download the configuration to initiate data collection with the specified alarm output LV 22 LogView 989592 Software Reference Using Exception Capturing LogView can be set up to wait for defined events to occur then capture data until another specified event The triggering process is controlled through the Acquisition Configuration window see page LV 42 If Auto Re arm is used LogBook will then re arm itself after each triggering sequence waiting for the f L occurrence of the next trigger event This setup allows LogBook to capture specific events rather than a continuous d
65. no toolbar window After a file is selected or multiple files you can toggle check boxes on off for each format icon type When ready to begin the conversion select the lt Convert gt button and set up the destination folder filename Data collected with LogBook can be uploaded to your PC s hard disk in any or all of several data formats for post acquisition analysis Some of the available file formats include Snap Master DADISP Matlab and ASCII Excel which is compatible with most software for analysis Log View creates the necessary header files for each data format so that the software can use the channel labels the timebase information and other parameters Converted data files are placed in format specific subdirectories of the binary source file directory Rates Trigger Blocks and Segments LogBook has the capacity to save channel data at four independent rates For each enabled rate a file is created For example 1f all four rates are being used four files will be present after an upload Depending on the Upload Preference settings as discussed in Preferences page LV 45 the file names will look similar to the following TEST R1 B1 1 BIN TEST 1s the name of the acquisition configuration TEST R2 B1 1 BIN Rn shows the rate number R1 through R4 is Ratel through Rate 4 TEST R3 B1 1 BIN Bn m shows the trigger block and segment numbers TEST R4 B1 1 BIN For example B1 1 indicates Block1 Segment 1
66. o For specific DBK card information refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF Note The LogBook 360 rear panel supports three termination panels Many different combinations are possible Blank Panel BNC Connectors Safety Jacks single ended Safety Jacks Differential DBK601 plus Analog Common plus Analog Common plus Analog Common DBK602 DBK603 DBK604 Kn PK stem AK caret PK Seam 9 stom HK Stree T C Connectors Differential Terminal Blocks Strain Relief Clamp DB37 Connectors Female DBK605 B DBK605 R 16 connections per block DBK607 DBK608 DBK605 J DBK605 S 48 connections per panel DBK605 K DBK605 T DBK606 WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to all system connected devices prior to connecting or disconnecting cables or setting hardware configurations Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death and equipment damage even under low voltage conditions CAUTION Use ESD tools containers and procedures during setup of DBK cards Electrostatic discharge can damage some components To prevent pin damage align DBK cards with the backplane DB37 connectors then gently press them together When using LogBook in attached mode the PC Card in LogBook must already have the file logbook sys Otherwise LogView cannot communicate with LogBook and LogBook will appear dead QS360 2 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Setting Up the Card Drawer LogBook 360 can house three DBK cards internally a
67. of this user s manual LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 9 Reference Note With modem support comes an application designed to automate the task of uploading data from one or several LogBooks This is application is referred to as the Upload Scheduler It is discussed on page 7 15 The remainder of this section for short haul modems explains the following steps Y 1 Configure the LogBook s PC Card Settings Page 7 11 Y 2 Set up the Modem Page 7 12 Y 3 Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook Page 7 12 Y 4 Configure the PC s Communication Parameters Page 7 13 Y 5 Validate the Connection Page 7 13 7 10 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Step Y 1 Configure the LogBook s PC Card Settings LogBook User s Manual L Start Log View 2 From the LogView toolbar click the lt Hardware Configuration gt button 3 On the LogBook Hardware Configuration tree select Serial COMM see figure LogBook Hardware Configuration oj ES r Configuration Settings LogBook gt Serial COMM Direct PC Connection y Direct PC Connection Modem S LogBook P1 pe Analog I0 P2 Hle Digital 10 P3 IF Analog I0 gt Digital 10 51 Serial GPS 52 Serial AU Serial COMM Connection Cellular Modem Connection at Fixed Baud OK Cancel LogBook Hardware
68. ten slot expansion enclosure the DBK32A or DBK33 installs into one of the analog expansion slots on the DBK41 s backplane A power card in any DBK41slot other than the leftmost when viewed from the rear will power the other cards that are connected to the DBK41 s backplane If using a DBK32A or a DBK33 with a DaqBook 100 Series DaqBook 200 Series or a DaqBoard ISA type device you must entirely remove the shunt jumpers from JP1 Failure to do so will result in damage to the 8254 timer chip Refer to the power card document modules and to the Daq device Hardware sections of the DaqBook 100 Series and DaqBook 200 Series and DaqBoard ISA user s manuals for JP1 locations and configurations VWOLTAG POWER PPT AU POWER OUT SELECT TT ice 135 Juin E MD MAh POWER i i cHARoING DEKIMA uscata a B TEEF UPS S BATTERY MODULE tre z Pa F F r r F VOLTAGE SELECT p HY UME DBK34A module provides 12 or 24 VDC with a 5 0 or 2 5 A hr capacity respectively The DBK34A is classified as a UPS Battery module The module can be used for in vehicle testing in scenarios where the vehicle s electrical system does not affect acquisition device power during starter current surge or power off Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 15 Power Requirements The improper use of power can cause system damage The following terms are important in regard to understanding your system s power needs e Supply power for sign
69. that provides multiple ranges Adjusting the range allows you to zoom in or out on your signal for maximum signal resolution for the range needed If the Units and or Scale from the User Scaling tab are changed the available ranges are presented in terms of the new units For example if a user scaling of x20 is applied to a channel to convert volts to PSI pounds per square inch the available range choices for that LogBook channel would be 200 PSI 100 PSI 50 PSI 0 400 PSI 0 200 PSI etc Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 31 The next figure shows the columns accessible with the Storage tab selected default If channels are sampled only to derive calculated channels or stimulate outputs they do not need to be stored For example a channel can be sampled at a high rate to prevent aliasing while a calculated channel is used to derive and save its maximum every 10 seconds In this case only one sample every 10 seconds is saved rather than thousands The Sample Rates columns in read only mode are set up in the Acquisition Configuration dialog box where up to 4 timebases can be defined For applications with slow and fast signals slow signals can be sampled at a slower rate optimizing the system s storage capacity The base rate A can be divided by 3 divisors for rates B C and D see page LV 43 Storage DBE Parameters User Scaling Pomt Cal Sample Rates Physical User Label On Dif Reading Range Units anne Chann
70. the right Most of the options cover default use of filenames and validating changes to files As explained in the File Management section see page LV 8 LogView can generate multiple data files for an acquisition and then automatically name them These names have a long format with several fields seed serial number date armed time armed trigger block segment Unless you need the long format name to prevent file overwrites you can uncheck the fields you don t need For example if only using one LogBook the serial number is not needed 989592 w Log View Preferences General Download Upload On Open New Log iew Configuration i Use Untitled as default configuration name C Use Logbook as default configuration name If On Open file validate save current configuration changes IY On Exit validate save current configuration changes If On Arm validate match between LogBook and Log iew configuration e On Disarm validate stop acquisition e On Disk Swap overwrite configuration files on new disk File Converter Cancel LogView Preferences General Tab Selected w Log iew Preferences General Download Upload On Download Untitled Configuration f Walidate acquisition name on download f Use Logbook as configuration name 4 Validate Logbook file s overwrite Cancel LogView Preferences Download Tab Selected Help w Log iew Preferences
71. the source of most transducer error ip For strain gages use the User Scaling tab to enter the transducers transfer functions e g volts to pounds then use 2 point calibration to periodically trim the scale and offset This eliminates the need to manually adjust sensors using hardware potentiometers Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 19 LV 20 Analog Input Channel Configuration Miel Ed View Edit Channel Configuration Enter scale value 2 1 Storage Rates DEK Parameters User Scaling 2 Point Cal Channel User UserScaling User Label On Off Reading Range Units Type 4 F CHOO On 1 575t0 3 675 Volt Direct F1_CH 1 On 10 0 to 10 0 Volt Direct P1 CHO2 On 10 0 to 10 0 Volt Direct Scale and offset to convert to engineering units Type in desired values FinalRheading Scale RawReading Offset User Scaling Final Reading Scale RawReading Offset An Example of Using LogView for 2 Point Calibration LogView Once the trimpots have been physically adjusted during initial installation periodic trimming can be performed through LogView s 2 Point software calibration The LogView procedure does not require the use of trimpots and should not be confused with the 2 point method in which trimpots are mechanically calibrated as discussed in the DBK16 section of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual During the LogView software procedure or 2 loads are read and compared with
72. the window set the Base Rate A to the maximum frequency required for any channel Acquisition Configuration F Infinite Rearms Mumber of Re arme o Enable Event Mark Enable Time Stamp F Trigger Block Definition 7 Scan Rate eran Internal Clack Max Frequency 100 0 kHz f External Clock e Hote reduction averaging aca AE Base Rate 4 Rate E M Rate D M Acquisition Configuration Window 3 Check all three rate checkboxes B C D Type in a divider for rates B through D to create sub rate sampling frequencies which are based on Base Rate A LogView will compute and display the corresponding rates in frequency or period units Note The higher the divider right most column the slower the scan rate Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 17 4 To reduce noise in sensitive channels like thermocouples these channels can be sampled at a high rate but stored at a slower rate after mathematically averaging the intermediate values By checking the Apply Noise Reduction Averaging checkbox channels stored at a sub rate will store the average of all of the values collected at the Base Rate A Extraneous values that are obvious errors will have less effect on the data it s also possible to set up a calculated channel that only accepts values within a defined range 5 Close the Acquisition Configuration Window 6 Click the Analog lt Input gt button to display the Analog Input Channel Configuration window Under the
73. trigger parameters you wish to use see Simple Data Logging page LV 14 8 Download the acquisition setup file just configured to LogBook 9 Click the Arm Acquisition button LogBook is now armed and ready to collect data when the trigger parameter is satisfied 10 During the acquisition you can monitor system status via LogBook Monitor window accessed from the Device pull down menu To verify proper operation such monitoring is recommended for the first run of a new acquisition setup file 11 After collecting data click the lt Upload gt button to pull the data into the PC see page LV 25 Depending on the communication channel and size of data files uploads take a variable amount of time Uploads can also be done incrementally during an acquisition The next time you launch LogView it will automatically look for the selected LogBook and attempt to attach itself At this point LogView and LogBook will be in constant communication If you want to turn off LogBook s power or detach the communication cable you should first select Break from the Device menu or Exit from the File menu PC Cards purchased with LogBook have been initialized at the factory PC Cards purchased elsewhere must be initialized through LogView The initialization procedure is discussed in the following paragraph Initializing a PC Card PC Cards that were purchased with LogBook have been initialized PC Cards purchased elsewhere must be initialized In
74. you can configure the system apply further data processing or manage multiple LogBooks LogView stores data in a conventional format so that other software can use the acquired data for analysis control alarms reporting etc Note The PC can be attached to LogBook via a serial or parallel connection alternatively in the stand alone mode the PC can be unattached and communicate with LogBook via a PC Card that is manually transferred between the PC and LogBook LogBook System File Must be on the PC Card nel The file logbook sys is LogBook s operating system Without it LogBook will not work YH In fact if the Logbook sys file is not on LogBook s internal PC Card the LogBook will not power on After software is installed as discussed in the Quick Start sections the 500 KB logbook sys file will reside in the LogView folder on the hard drive of the host PC To be used by a LogBook logbook sys must have already been downloaded to the PC Card which resides inside LogBook Downloading When LogView downloads the lve acquisition setup file to a PC Card it checks to see if the current release version of logbook sys is already on the PC Card If so fine if not logbook sys must also be downloaded to the PC Card Thus downloading to a PC Card that is being used for the first time will take longer than subsequent downloads nel Failure to upgrade to the current release version of logbook sys can result in software J
75. you may need to perform one or more of the following in order of effectiveness e Choose a slower scan rate or change the trigger parameters e Reduce the number of output channels e Reduce the number or complexity of calculated channels e Reduce the number of input channels Estimating an Optimum Scan Rate Note The scan rate can be measured as a frequency in Hz or kHz or as a period in ms or ws These two measures are reciprocals of each other e g 1 100 kHz 10 us Processing input channels is LogBook s highest priority each input channel is collected at 10 ws After all the inputs are collected LogBook performs the necessary calculations and then updates the enabled outputs The time to perform calculations and outputs varies with the type of calculation and this makes it difficult to predict the exact length of time required Simple calculations are done much faster than functions for non linear thermocouples and RTDs or the use of logical and bitwise calculated channels Output channels can take from 100 us to 300 us so for very approximate results we ll use 200 us To estimate the maximum scan rate use the following formula approximate scan period number of inputs x 10 us number of outputs x 200 us If only 5 input channels are enabled the scan period equals 50 us with a frequency of 20 kHz If one output channel is added the period becomes 250 us with a frequency of 4 kHz Tip After running the acquisition ch
76. 0 Block Diagram 1 4 LogBook 360 Block Diagram 1 5 The Use of PC Cards with LogBook 1 6 System Software 1 8 Operational Features 1 8 Data Acquisition Overview 1 8 LogBook System File Must be on the PC Card 1 9 Communications 1 10 Triggering and Scan Timing 1 11 Scan Rate Limitations 1 11 Use of Outputs to Alarm and Control 1 13 Acquisition 1 13 Data Storage and Retrieval 1 13 Specifications 1 15 LogBook Basics What are LogBooks LogBook 300 and LogBook 360 are PC based data acquisition systems that can work in a stand alone mode no PC present or linked to a PC They combine onboard intelligence with a removable PC Card that stores the configuration file and the collected data LogBooks have many options most of which are detailed in the LBK chapter and in the DBK Option Cards and Modules document Note that the PC link can be by serial or parallel port Sensor Transducer DBK Signal Conditioner Process device or condition to be monitored LogBook 300 Simple System Setup The PC Card holds the configuration file created by LogView The file tells LogBook how to perform a particular acquisition The PC Card also holds the acquired data files The PC can upload to or download from the PC Card by cable if the PC is attached to LogBook or by physical transport of the PC Card from one unit to the other Multiple configuration files an
77. 0 chassis 10 i 45 VDC Filters etc and can not be seen when looking input via DINS I I I I I at an assembled LogBook 360 b Power Supply LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 5 The following components are represented in the previous block diagrams Certain items apply only to LogBook 360 as noted e Removable PC Card A 12 520 MB capacity holds the software operating system user configurations and the acquired data The PC Card is at the center of LogBook operations A PC Card pre programmed by LogView ensures an unattached LogBook comes up properly e Power Supply The internal power supply accepts an input of 10 to 45 VDC and supplies filtered regulated voltages to its internal circuits and to accessories connected via P1 2 3 An external AC to DC adapter for all standard voltages is included with the system e System Controller A microprocessor chip is used within LogBook with either 4 MB standard of RAM or 16 MB optional A field upgradeable 512 KB Flash memory is used to store the system startup code self diagnostics and Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA configuration The FPGA controls every LogBook operation including real time control By using Internal flash memory instead of EPROMs field upgrades of virtually all functions including FPGA circuitry are possible Most software will be read from the disk drive e Analog Inpu
78. 00 Series page DD 9 3 26 x 8 32 Category DBK2 DBK4 DBK5 DBK7 DBK8 DBK9 DBK11A DBK12 DBK13 DBK15 DBK16 DBK17 DBK18 DBK19 DBK20 DBK21 DBK25 DBK32A DBK33 DBK44 DBK45 DBK81 DBK82 DBK83 Dimensions for DBK200 Series Devices page DD 10 DBK200 DBK201 DBK202 DBK203 Module See 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 Category DBK204 Module See 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 Category DBK205 DBK206 DBK207 DBK207 CJC DBK208 DBK209 Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components page DD 17 DIN 1 DIN rail mounting kit for DBK206 207 207CJC 208 209 page DD 17 DIN 2 DIN rail mounting for DBK209 page DD 18 POD 1 for use with DBK83 page DD 19 TB 100 Terminal Connector Option 68 pin SCSI III Screw Terminal Board Page DD 20 WBK61 WBK62 High Voltage Adapters page DD 21 Dimensional Drawings 878394 DD 1 Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 Category Modern Chassis MAIA LNOY4 DD 2 q iN o 001 MALIA ACIS LAHT MAIA dOL MAIA Hails LHoOLa 06 8 These dimensions apply to the following DaqBook 100 120 112 200 216 DBK1 DBK10 DBK23 DBK24 DBK30A DBK43A DBK50 DBK51 DBK52 DBK53 DBK54 DBK203 DBK204 TempBook 66 WaveBook 512 WaveBook 512H WBK10 WBK10H WBK10A WBK14 WBK15 WBK16 WBK17 WBK25 a on O OS S 878394 0071 REAR VIEW Dimensional Drawings Chass
79. 00 Series device b Connect the free end of the cable to the DBK card or module Optional Method a Connect a CA 195 x cable to the P4 connector on the DaqBook 2000 Series device b Connect the free end of the cable to a DBK200 Series device c Connect the DBK option to the DBK200 Series device as applicable The primary reason that less noise is seen in the preferred method is that a DaqBook 2000 Series device s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I O This provides a strong degree of isolation between the two signal types However in the case of a CA 195 x cable connected to P4 digital and analog signals co exist in one cable If you need to use the P4 connection method use of the 8 inch ribbon cable CA 195 1 will result in the lowest level of crosstalk for that method 967794 DBK Basics pg 5 pg 6 Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook 2000 Series Device via P1 P2 and or P3 The DBKs do not connect directly to the port but through a CA 37 x ribbon cable where x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected For example a CA 37 3 cable includes a 37 pin mating connector to interface with the DaqBook 2000 Series DB37 connector P1 P2 P3 it also includes three additional DB37 connectors These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port Use of a CA 37 16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added to one DaqBook 2000
80. 00 oy 20000000 oog oy o0000 00000 OOOOOO00000000000000 CHL cE 8 CHL ce 8 0 8 These dimensions apply to the following DaqBook 2000E DaqBook 2000X WaveBook 516E WBK40 WBK41 an uN OR 8 S888 A oooooooo OOoOoOoooo0ogo0oono OOOoOoooo0o00n0 OOoOoooo0o0g0o OOODODOODODO OODOODOODO Oooo00 E 0000 co co 50 30 nn m a Ul Oo 878394 93 REAR VIEW Dimensional Drawings Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 14 x 3 44 Category Modern Chassis MAIA 1INOY4 Dimensional Drawings 00 00 00 0000 DODODODO 000000000000 00 000000 oc oooo lt Z mile mi LOP H oO al DD 00 00 DO DOOODOODODOO DD 00 00500 00000000000000 000000000 a 00000000 0005000000 GHL 2 8 GHL ee 8 These dimensions apply to the following DaqBook 260 DBK60 LogBook 360 E El H v gt S x ga E 54 a o m 1 5 m 1 o0 00 Lt m 1 o sE 200000 lt 2 Alu H U al 00 0 I W Su fo 00 PO amp 878394 DD 7 Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 14 x 3 44 Category Legacy Chassis These dimensions apply to the gt o following DaqBook 260 oe DBK60 o NR O 3 00 LogBook 360 8 Y O o 3 38 ae ME A A a a E l 3 16 10 32 THD 8 32 THD 4 PLACES 6 PLACES 3 44 0 62 1 41 DD 8 878394 Dimensional Drawings Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards exc
81. 9 Protocol RS232 Interrupt request C Weekly C Monthly C Every 2 Days To change these port settings go to LogBook 0 Configuration in Windows Control Panel n Failure Retry 20 times in 30 sec OK Cancel Upload events can execute once or periodically An active Scheduler window is depicted in the following figure The image has been split so it could be shown in its entirety at its present scale LogYiew Scheduler C Log iew schd2 L 5 Schedule Event Upload Start Upload Stop 1 LogBookL LPT1 10 20 7998 1 00 00 PM 0170172999 12 00 00 AM Hourly 2 LogBook115k COM4 02241999 2 30 00 PM 0701 2999 12 00 00 AM Hourly 0 Retry Number Retry Period 03 16 1999 10 00 00 AM 0377677999 9 00 00 AM z 30 03 16 1999 10 30 00 AM 037 1671999 9 30 00 4M 3 30 Show Log Exit Active Upload Scheduler split for complete image When the Upload Scheduler is activated a Clock LogBook icon appears in the N ES 3 44 AM Windows Desktop System Tray as shown in the figure at the left System Tray Note If the Upload Scheduler is active upon computer shutdown it will automatically activate when the computer 1s restarted 7 16 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual 1 LogBook115K COM1 OL x Scheduled upload started 3 30 99 at 9 46 37 AM Destination file on upload C LogView data TEST 4 D 03 29 99 714 468 5971 B1 26 BIN 1 of 3
82. 91999 12 00 00 AM Daily 032201999 2 00 00 AM 03197999 2 00 00 AM 20 3 Train 69 Zoom W 03719 1999 3 00 00 AM 09 19 1999 12 00 00 AM Daily 0372071999 3 00 00 AM 03 19 1999 3 00 00 Aki 20 gt Activate Show Log Exit The Upload Scheduler automates the process of uploading data from one or many LogBooks In the above example the Scheduler automatically initiates a session with each LogBook at the specified time and uploads the available data When the user arrives in the morning all the data is immediately available for inspection on the PC s hard drive LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 15 A scheduled event can be configured to execute only one time or periodically from Begin Schedule time to Stop Schedule time Periodic configurations can be made for uploads every hour day week or month without operator intervention If the scheduled upload should fail for any reason LogView will retry the upload the number of times indicated in the Retry field These attempts are initiated at the duration indicated in the time in field The following figure shows that there will be 20 retry attempts A retry will occur every 30 seconds until the upload is successful Add Event Ed Begin Schedule Device Train 110 ES Date 03 19 1999 Time 1 00 004M Stop Schedule Date 09 19 1999 Time 12 00 00 AM Upload Frequency Hourly Port Settings 1 440 555 166
83. A 0 eee Crand El DEKA 1 De Chan 1 ea k AES El DEK 4 2 Em DBE Dynamic Signal Cardi iS i im Chan O E OBK4 3 DF Chan 1 M DEBRA 4 Ea DBE Dinamic Signal Card 2 M DBE41 51 Selecting Applicable DBK4 Dynamic Signal Cards 5 Click the Analog lt Input gt button to view the newly setup channels in the Analog Input Channel Configuration spreadsheet see page LV 30 Verify all channel numbers and assign user labels as y desired Input Note In some cases such as with DBK19 channel values are returned in units of temperature instead of volts 6 From the Analog Input Channel Configuration window select the DBK Parameters tab to view specific settings for each DBK channel Set the DBK parameters at this time If necessary refer to the appropriate section of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual for an explanation of the parameters for example DBK4 programmable filter values and DBK7 debouncing times i You can resize the Analog Input Channel Configuration window by dragging its right edge further to the right This allows you to see up to four parameters for each channel LV 16 LogView 989592 Software Reference Channel Configuration DBE Filter Cut Off Frequency eM Storage i i 2 Point Cal Physical Hz E DEK Parameters P1_CHO0_0_0 P1_ CHOO oem Volt DEK4 File maxFg ER PI CH00_0 1 P1_CHOO_ OMA E Volt DBK4 F F3 P1_CH00_1_0 P1_CH00_1_0 On 3159t0 3159 Vol DBK4 F papi Choo 1_ 1 P1_CH00_11 On 3 159 to
84. Edit Channel Configuration la Ue Lebel a F Channel Sample Rate t Ela anne BT Lape H cadng oma Type cnn P2 Pot_A Local P2 Port_B EA P2 Pot C P2 Pot C rA P3 HSDI_O P3 HSDI_O Local ro digital input point designator Go to Hardware Configuration dialog to set Digital amp Counter Input Channel Configuration Each Channel as a Port of Bits The Physical Channel column identifies the actual hardware port of the physical channel In the User Label column you can use the default channel names or type in a more suitable label up to 32 characters in length These labels are saved with the collected data The On column can enable On or disable Off individual channels To maximize system performance only channels that are enabled are sampled The Reading column displays the read time value of the digital port in the format specified in the Format column Analog digital and pulse samples are all sampled together in LogBook This makes time correlation possible In the Acquisition Configuration dialog box up to four timebases can be specified A digital or pulse channel can be sampled at any or all of these timebases Channels sampled only to derive calculated channels or to simulate outputs do not need to be stored Output Channels Configuration nu The Output spreadsheet shows all of the currently available digital and analog output channels Each Output output channel requires a source channel to feed it
85. Frequency 100 0 kHz 7 External Clack an Appii nake reduchon averaging Stop or Duration Durations fi Min Acquisition Configuration Window 7 After verifying that all settings are as you desire select Save under the File menu and associate a name to your acquisition setup file 1f not already done so 8 From the main toolbar click the lt Download gt button to send the setup file to 4 LogBook s PC Card 9 To arm an attached LogBook click the Arm gt button bownld or Down 10 To arm a remote LogBook eject the PC Card transport it to LogBook insert it into LogBook s socket and then apply power 11 To upload data from an attached LogBook during or after an acquisition click the lt Upload gt button 12 To upload data from a remote LogBook after the acquisition is complete or as part of card or swapping eject the PC Card from LogBook and transport to the PC s socket then click the lt Upload gt button 13 To inspect the data click the lt View Data gt button This will activate a view program if installed Upload Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 15 Setting Up DBK Cards DBK cards and modules provide channel expansion and signal conditioning For proper operation you EJ saris must use Log View for software configuration of the DBK cards All hardware configuration related Ena parameters can be found in the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window sometimes referred to as a
86. Function column type in the following equation P1_CH00 gt 30 0 amp 1 If you re not using channel 0 replace P1_CHOO with your channel tag This equation will yield a 1 in its least significant bit when the value of channel 0 is above 30 and 0 when it is below 30 o E Calculated Channel Configuration la Edit Calc Channel Configuration Enter function expression AM UNBAN ssc ES Fo as zer Labe n alculation Function Beading nita i OGAN D CALC 00 c Lc_00 On PI CHOO 0 0 30081 Yes No No No T CALC o CALC OI Off Yes No No No Entering an Equation Function Expression ip To verify accurate use of syntax access the Equation Assistant see following figure via the F x button and click the lt Validate gt button Refer to page LV 37 for detailed information regarding the Equation Assistant Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 21 CALC 00 P1_CHO0 gt 30 0 1 Analog Inputs Digital Inputs Calc Channels User Label PI_CHDO P1_CHOD f a A P1_CAO1 P1_CHAD1 P1_CHO2 P1_CHO2 P1_CHOS P1_CH03 Relational and Equality P1_CH04 P1_CHO4 lt AREE Ci Validation ig successtul Logical oF OF Cancel The Equation Assistant can be used to create and validate equations 6 In the Calculated Channel setup grid set the newly configured channel to On Close the Calculated Channel grid 8 Click the lt Output gt I O Setup button If
87. General Download Upload Data File Names on Upload W Include file name seed Prompt for file name seed on upload FF Include LogBook serial number IY Include date when acquisition was armed IY Include time when acquisition was armed I Include trigger block segment number Upload Data of Different Subrates To f Separate file per each subrate Single file of merged data M Validate save Lag iew configuration changes on upload M Validate file overwrite on upload F Do not upload trigger block if only pre trigger M Automatically delete Logbook data files after Uploact amp ll M Validate before deleting LogBook data files on Uploac amp ll Cancel Help LogView Preferences Upload Tab Selected LogView LV 45 For data conversion 1 Select the LogView Preferences General Tab 2 Click on the lt File Converter gt button The File Converter Preferences dialog box appears 3 Select the formats you want to save your data in 4 If desired check to automatically delete the source data file after conversion The default avoids automatic deletion of the source data file 5 Select the overwriting related preference you desire The default is to Validate overwriting of each existing file General File Converter so File Converter Preferences Header File Ext Subdirecto DlAdem He DAT diaderm E ASCII Text Spreadsheet TAT T ascll E DADISP DAT HEQ dadisp DAS Lab
88. H glitches This problem can be resolved by reformatting the PC Card using Windows Explorer s File Format feature and then reinitializing the PC Card LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 9 i Due to the file size and relative transfer time insert first time PC Cards into the PC s card socket rather than LogBook s Downloading via the PC s socket takes only a few seconds however using LogBook s socket and a communications channel will take much longer about 7 minutes at 9600 bps Regarding the logbook sys file and Power Loss After LogBook is started it can store data to a PC Card that does not have the logbook sys file However in this case if LogBook loses power it will not be able to restart LogBook will restart when powered on with a PC Card that does have the logbook sys file i Because LogBook needs the logbook sys file to become operational after loosing power due to an outage or being turned off keep the Logbook sys file on all PC Cards that will be used for data storage Communications Protocols LogBook uses only standard supported widely available communication channels to minimize device driver development The messages transmitted over these channels are also standard human readable ASCII for commands and status and standard file transfer protocols such as X modem for block data transfers The messages and protocols are independent of the choice of communication channel exc
89. HA hardware tree Reference Note The DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual PDF p n 457 0905 contains parameter definitions and information as to which parameters are set in hardware and which are set in software 1 Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the lt H W gt Hardware Configuration button 2 To add analog input DBKs select P1 Analog I O in the tree and set its property to Single ended Digital DBKs use P2 port and are set up in a similar way 3 Select a channel and assign it either a local channel or a specific DBK expansion module that will multiplex several channels into the same main channel See following figure LogBook Hardware Configuration amp LogBook P1 ev Analog IO r Configuration Settings LogBook gt P1 gt Analog 10 gt P1_CHOO Expansion lt P1_CHO1 lt P1_CH02 lt P1_CHO3 P1_CHD4 lt P1 CHOS Setting Analog I O Channel PI_CH00 DBKS2 T C Card Selected 4 Most DBKs have related cards and sub channels as part of their method to multiplex up to 16 channels into each main channel Click the appropriate checkboxes to set up the channels and then OK to accept these settings See following figure amp Logbook F1 E Analog 10 Ss PI_CHOO Lontiguratian Settings LogBook gt P1 gt Analog 10 gt P1_CHOO Expansion DBE Dinamic Signal Card CEA DBE Dynamic Signal Card 0 EJ DEBR
90. I_CH15 P1_CHI5 Relational and Equality DE Cancel Equation Assistant Dialog Box Equation Assistant Function Buttons Arithmetic Z se A subtraction addition multiplication division modulus exponentiation Relational and Equality lt gt lt gt f less than or greater than less than greater than not equal equal to or equal to Bitwise Note Bitwise functions are briefly discussed in the text which immediately follows this table amp a lt lt gt gt Bitwise And Bitwise Or Bitwise Not Shift Left Shift Right Logical Note Logical functions are briefly discussed in the related text which follows this table And Or Not Note Modulus has several possible meanings As used in the equation assistant modulus is the remainder which results when the first operand is divided by the second For example the modulus for 3 3 is 0 the modulus for 3 257 3 is 0 257 and the modulus for 5 2 is 1 0 LV 38 LogView 989592 Software Reference Bitwise Operators The bitwise operators perform bitwise AND amp bitwise OR I and bitwise Not operations Syntax AND expression amp equality expression OR expression Not expression Not expression AND expression The operands of bitwise operators must have integral types but their types can be different These operators perform the usual arithmetic conversions the type of the result is the type of the operands after
91. K60O has several termination panel options e g BNC Safety jack T C removable block screw terminal slotted and DB37 style For more than six cards use the 10 slot DBK41 Several DBK41s can be daisy chained to handle a large number of DBKs in a system Another packaging option is the use of special enclosures for harsh environments These enclosures can be locked to prevent tampering conditioned for heat and or cold and sealed air or water tight For systems with many modules stacking units together helps conserve space and assure easy cable runs Such stacking can be accomplished with adhesive dual lock tabs or by the use of fastener panels splice plates The splice plate method provides for a more rigid stacking and 1s the preferred method Dual lock tabs are convenient for mounting a Notebook PC to a LogBook or DBK module e Dual lock tabs Adhesive dual lock tabs are typically used to attach a notebook PC to a LogBook or to a DBK module Dual lock Tabs e Fastener panels Optional splice plate kits can be used to provide rigid stacking These kits include metal plates that form a vertical rack of two or more modules This method allows the enclosure to size itself as needed A handle can be attached for convenience Fastener Panel x2 nA Optional Handle each with 4 screws with 2 screws LogBook User s Manual 957096 System Expansion 4 5 P1 P2 and P3 Port Connectors LogBooks have three port connectors P1
92. M FILES LOGYIEWSAPPLICATIONS Untitled_Ivc 9 Configuration Window This window exposes the hardware configuration tree used to configure DBK expansion cards and hardware settings Selecting any of the 3 Serial ports at the bottom of the tree exposes their settings on the right The bottom most serial port is the LogBook communication port used to connect the LogBook to a PC or modem The items labeled S1 and S2 are the 2 serial device input ports On the al C LogBook connector panel the connectors for S1 eP None E and S2 are marked Serial GPS and pe Digital IO ee Serial AUX respectively The 1 port is amp 51 Serial GPS moana labeled GPS because if used a GPS should only e be connected to this port If a GPS is not being used any serial device can be connected to S1 and or S2 The default configuration settings for Sl and S2 are designed for standard GPS receivers If you re using a GPS on S1 leave the settings in their default states For general serial devices the baud rate data bits parity and stop bits settings should all be set to match the serial device The RTS Mode setting regulates the RS 232 handshaking The Input Buffer Full setting enables hardware handshaking The Always On setting disables handshaking Once the settings for S1 and S2 have been entered click OK to close the window GPS Serial Input Channel Configuration To configure a serial input or GPS channe
93. O9 P1_CHOS 10 0 to 10 0 Direct ae 7 Ea P1_CH10 PI _CH10 10 0 to 10 0 Direct P1_CH11 PI CH11 10 0 to 10 0 Direct sai cara Pr cH12 10 0 to 10 0 Direct Sg e MA Analog Input Channel Configuration 2 Point Cal Tab Selected Point Cal Channel Pomt Calibration Type Actual F1 Actual P2 Cal Scale Cal Offset Direct Direct Direct 2 Point Cal Tab Partial Close up 4 Apply a voltage to channel 1 near the bottom end of the measurement range Type the known value into the Set P1 column for the associated channel 6 Click the lt Execute gt button under the Get P1 heading This allows you to read the channel and calculate the required offset Note that the channel value read is now shown in the Actual P1 column and the Cal Offset column now shows the correction factor 7 Apply a voltage to channel 1 near the top of the measurement range Type the known value into the Set P2 column for the associated channel 9 Click the lt Execute gt button under the Get P2 heading to read the channel and calculate the required offset and scale Note that the channel value is now shown in the Actual P2 column The Cal Offset and Cal Scale columns now show the correction factors For channels using thermocouples it may be impractical to provide more than one calibration point In such cases apply just one known point in Set P1 and click the corresponding lt Execute gt button This will adjust the offset only which is typically
94. Oo E Path LogBookEA TTTS Scan Rate A F a Trigger Blocks Size Bute Acquisittan_1 3718798 1 22 44 559 PM 5 144000 Acquisition_2 3718798 1 24 35 730 PM 3 144000 Filename plead Upload Selected Upload Configuration Delete Refresh Close Exploring LogBookC TTTS Acquisition_ Fath Logbook C TTTS Aequisitior_1 scan Rate A lt Size Byte a TriggerBlock_1 1 0 6000 48000 TriggerBlock_ 2 1 0 954 bse eit TriggeBlock_ 2 2 o 1500 12000 TrogerBlock_2 3 0 3546 20368 TrogerBlock_3 1 0 6000 48000 Filename TriogerBlock_2 2 plied al Upload Selected Upload Configuration Pelete Refresh Cloze LogBook Explorer Window Two Examples Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 49 Tools Menu The Tools menu provides three selections e Convert Binary Data allows you to convert raw binary data bin files into other formats that you may find more useful e Merge Binary Data allows you to merge Rate files and to concatenate Trigger Block segments e View Data Accesses the independent view program for graphing and analysis of previously recorded data The Convert Binary Data menu option allows you to convert raw binary data bin files into other formats that you may find more useful You must first select an existing binary file to be converted Convert Binary Data The filename can be typed in or selected by the lt Browse gt button that leads to a folder file search
95. P1_CHO6 lt P1_CHO7 lt P1_CHO8 P1_CHO9 o lt P1_CH10 e P1_CH11 o lt P1_CH12 o lt P1_CH13 o lt P1_CH14 o lt P1_CH15 This figure shows user selecting a particular DBK to be attached to channel 15 of P1 E P2 H le gt Digital 10 E P3 L lt v Analog 10 Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 29 Analog Input Channel Configuration LV 30 a Input LogView LogBook Hardware Configuration e P1_CH13 o lt P1_CH14 o lt P1_CH15 S gt Digital lO Ero Bank_0 lt Chan 0 lt Chan 1 lt Chan 2 lt Chan 3 lt Chan 4 os Chan 5 HF P3 LogBook Hardware Configuration lt Chan 0 E Chan 1 lt Chan 2 HF P3 ie Analog 10 U gt Digital 10 lt P3_HSDI o lt P3_CTR_O os P3_CTR_1 lt P3_CTR_2 oe P3_CTR_3 e lt P3_TIMER ES DBK20 Digital 1 0 Card e DBK24 Isolated Digital Output Carc al 989592 Configuration Settings LogBook gt P2 gt Digital 10 Configuration Settings LogBook gt P3 gt Digital O gt P3_TIMER Expansion channels DBK20 Digital 1 0 Card E igital 1 0 Card igital 1 0 Card ted Digital Input Card solated Digital Output Card iqital 140 Card _ This figure shows user selecting a particular DBK as assigned to 1 of 4 banks of channels on P2 This figure shows user selecting LogBook s timer on P3 s Digital I O line The analog input spreadsheet see following figure uses
96. PS Chapter 7 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler provides instruction for communicating with remote LogBooks via modem The chapter also discusses the independent Upload Scheduler application which can be used to configure events to initiate data uploads for one or more LogBooks Chapter 8 CE Compliance pertains to CE standards and conditions relevant to LogBook systems LogView is a reference document for the out of the box data acquisition software Appendix A A Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual This appendix only applies to users of Cirronet s HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems In regard to using other modems with LogBook refer to chapter 7 Error Codes two lists of error codes one for Log View software and another for LogBook hardware Dimensional Drawings Contains basic dimensional drawings that apply to several data acquisition products including LogBook 300 LogBook 360 and DBK options Glossary Reference Notes During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals are automatically installed onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs directory which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop For detailed information regarding specific DBKs refer to the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual PDF Each DBK section includes device specific hardware and software information The document includes a ch
97. Place it on the bottom track of the chassis B Carefully slide the card drawer into the chassis When it engages the bottom track level the card drawer and continue inserting it until it engages with the P1 interconnect board C Tighten the three captive thumbscrews holding the termination panels to the chassis D Install the two screws holding the card drawer to the chassis 13 Connect external signals Connect signal inputs from sensors to termination panels 14 Install top cover If the top cover was removed slide it back into place and secure with two screws LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Qs360 5 Connecting the LogBook 360 to the PC External DBKs and to Power The following hardware connection figure and procedure are generic details vary with system complexity For unattached mode a pre configured PC Card is inserted in the PC Card slot and no connection to a PC is made The following figure illustrates the attached mode Note Connecting LogBook 360 to a PC applies to the attached mode only Many applications will make use of three internal DBK cards only having no need to attach external DBK cards or modules as discussed in the following text Step 4 Connect the LogBook s DIN5 power in connector to the AC adapter and connect the adapter to a suitable power outlet Note that other power options are discussed in the DBK Basics section of this manual AC to DC Adapter For unattache
98. Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader is included on your CD The Reader provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 21 pg 22 DBK Basics 967794 Daq Systems LBK and other non DBK Options 9 LBK Options Location Reference 5 1 LBK COM 422 485 5 2 LBK MEM1 U Expanded Memory 16 MB Upgrade 5 3 LBK1 Remote LogBook Terminal 5 4 LBK2 Four Channel Digital to Analog Output 5 9 Remote On Off Switch and LED Indicator Options 5 11 Reference Notes gt GPS and Serial Device Data Collection information is presented in Chapter 6 gt Modem and Upload Scheduler information is presented in Chapter 7 LBK Options Location Reference The following location reference applies to hardware aspects of LogBook s LBK options A fuse serial board and PC Card are included in the illustration for component reference Although the following drawing is based on LogBook 360 it can be used for LogBook 300 motherboard reference The remainder of this chapter discusses the installation of each option and includes a board layout The serial board is factory installed in LogBook 360 and is GPS shown exploded for clarity only E Note tha
99. REQUENCY HIGH SPEED DIGITAL I O P2 DIGITAL W O LogBook 300 Rear Panel 969591 LogBook User s Manual LogBook 360 panel items are listed in the following table Note that LogBook 300 panel items are the same as those on the 360 except as called out in the following bulleted list e Slight differences in the overlay e P1 P2 and P3 appear on LogBook 300 s rear panel e LogBook 300 has no SERIAL GPS connection ON OFF interior rotary switch Connectors POWER IN PARALLEL PORT TERMINAL PORT TO LBK1 SERIAL COMM TO PC OR MODEM SERIAL GPS LogBook 360 Only SERIAL AUX LogBook 360 Only P1 ANALOG l O P2 DIGITAL I O P3 PULSE FREQUENCY HIGH SPEED DIGITAL I O PC Card door no label Indicator LEDs TRIGGERED ACTIVE Safe Swap Light interior green LED Highlight of Features e LogBook 300 has no SERIAL AUX connection e LogBook 300 has no CHASSIS grounding post e LogBook 300 does not make use of Terminal Panels Depressing the push button switch turns the power on PC Card door provides access to a rotary switch to set device address when used in an RS 485 network This locking DIN5 input connector accepts 10 to 45 VDC This DB 25 plug is a parallel port connector to a host PC set to ECP mode This DB 9 socket is a serial port connector for the LBK1 remote control panel user interface terminal This DB 9 male serial COM port connects to a host PC or modem LogBook 360 only This
100. Remaining Time 00 02 49 Stop Upload Status Window Normal State LogBook115K MBA 1 10PM Lipload Status Window Minimize dh System Tray Section of Desktop Showing Upload Status Window normal and minimized states and the System Tray Each time the Upload Scheduler initiates an upload from LogBook the application creates a minimized Upload Status window see previous figure The Upload Status window provides schedule related information such as upload start time file destination and time remaining This window also states when an upload fails and when a retry will be attempted The Upload Scheduler saves a report of all its activities to the log file You can view the log file by clicking Upload Scheduler s Show Log button or by selecting Show Log menu item in the Schedule pull down menu B Lo Vw_D03 22 99_T09 26 35 log WordPad Fie Edit View Insert Format Help Djs alk al 1 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 12 15 08 AM Uploaded to C LOGVIEU data TEST4 DO4 01 99 T17 15 45 R4 B1 55 BIN LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 12 15 11 AM Scheduled procedure is over jt LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 00 01 AM Start of scheduled procedure DO 03 AM Device is attached 11 00 AM Uploaded to C LOGVIEW data TEST4 DO4 01 99 T17 15 45 R1 B1 56 BIN 11 28 AM Uploaded to C LOGVIEW data TES
101. T4 DO4 01 99 T17 15 45 R2 B1 56 BIN 16 04 AM Uploaded to C LOGVIEW data TEST4 DO4 01 99 T17 15 45 R4 B1 56 BIN 16 07 AM Scheduled procedure is over Pp ee ee ee ee ppp H LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 ty 00 02 AM Start of scheduled procedure 1 LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 3 00 04 AM Device is attached LogBook115K COM1 4 4 99 3 10 50 AM Uploaded to C LOGVIEW data TEST4 DO4 01 99 T17 15 45 Ri B1 57 BIN M b For Help press F1 i ma Log File in WordPad Default By default the Upload Scheduler opens the log file in WordPad You can choose to open the log file in other applications using the Schedule pull down menu Set Log Viewer menu item The log file will be located in the log subdirectory of the Log View install directory The Upload Scheduler will generate another log file as soon as the size of the current log file reaches IMB The Upload Scheduler will delete the oldest log file from the log directory when the number of log files exceeds 10 The Upload Scheduler uploads all binary data to the subdirectory data in the Log View installation directory LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 17 Frequently Asked Questions Q I ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device LogBook Serial Fixed It did not connect What should I do A Try the following a Turn OFF the LogBook then restart it to initialize the configuratio
102. The next figure outlines LogView s functional modes to help you visualize what LogView can do This functional organization is not the same as the menu organization LogView Function A nS a Monitor System Management Communication v M c Le Electronic Transfer Manual Transfer using PC Card LogBook Environment Setup System Setup includes the hardware the channels in the scan and the triggering Before data acquisition can begin all setups must be complete and the resulting setup file downloaded to the PC Card in LogBook e Hardware Configuration asks you to set the software parameters to match your hardware For some DBKs you may need to adjust the DBK s jumpers and DIP switches or at least verify that the Log View software setting matches the DBK hardware setting page LV 29 e Channel Setup pertains to using Log View to set the different types of channel parameters These include label On off range units format user scaling storage rates and DBK software parameters The types of channels that are set up through LogView are Analog Input page LV 30 Digital Input page LV 34 Output Channels page LV 35 GPS Serial Input page LV 36 and Calculated Channels page LV 36 The flexibility of the Calculated Channel allows you to create a virtual channel based on math and logic functions of real channels analog and digital other virtual channels and arbitrary numerical values e Acqu
103. USER S MANUAL LogBook 300 360 Stand alone Intelligent PC Based Data Acquisition Systems Measurement Computing LogBook 300 amp 360 10 Commerce Wa p n 461 0901 rev 7 0 Norton MA o 508 946 5100 Fax 508 946 9500 AOS ASA AA info mccdag com www mccdaq com 372180C 01 This page is intentionally blank Warranty Information Contact Measurement Computing by phone fax or e mail in regard to warranty related issues Phone 508 946 5100 fax 508 946 9500 e mail info mecdaqg com Limitation of Liability Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product Copyright Trademark and Licensing Notice All Measurement Computing documentation software and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved No part of this product may be copied reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical photographic electronic or other method without Measurement Computing s prior written consent IOtech product names are trademarked other product names as applicable are trademarks of their respective holders All supplied IOtech software including miscellaneous support files drivers and sample programs may only be used on one installation You may make archival backup copies CE Notice Warnings Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions standards of the European Community When appl
104. Up DBK Cards page LV 16 Using Multiple Timebases page LV 17 Using Digital 2 Point Calibration page LV 18 Using Digital Outputs As Alarms page LV 21 Using Exception Capturing page LV 23 989592 LogView LV 11 Flowchart of a Simple Acquisition Consider the flowchart of a simple data acquisition Whether LogBook is attached or unattached the process is similar except for downloading and uploading You begin the process in LogView by defining the parameters for an acquisition E al l Lis Upload UIST Basic Operational Flow of a LogBook Acquisition Using an Attached LogBook When using an attached LogBook LogView communicates directly to the PC Card in LogBook through the communication interface serial or parallel Attached by serial or parallel communication cable et a After LogView recognizes the attached LogBook an acquisition setup file can be downloaded to LogBook After the acquisition data can be uploaded from LogBook without handling the PC Card Note that steps 1 through 4 are often done during the initial installation LV 12 LogView 989592 Software Reference 1 On your PC with Log View already loaded open control panel applet and check Hardware Configuration If no LogBook is present in the tree click Add Device and a LogBook ID otherwise select a LogBook in the tree and click Properties 2 Under LogBook Properties tab enter or 2 LogBook Configuration
105. Wolt Yes CALC 03 CALC 03 Pl_CH14 2 Yollx2 Yes CALC 04 CALC 04 P1_CH14 P1_CH15 2 5 0 es o function expression for the calculated channel Type in desired expression or use default Look at row 2 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen above You will see that the user created a calculation function of CALC_00 And P1_CH15 gt 24 for the calculation channel having the channel ID of CALC_01 In this example the user wants to use CALC_01 as a logic indicator based on the state of both CALC_00 and physical channel P1l_CH15 In this example channel CALC_01 will read 1 if both of the following are true a CALC_00 has a value of 1 0 b P1_CH15 has a value greater than 24 Assume that P1_CH14 had a channel reading of 23 09 and that P1_CH15 had a value of 21 81 In this case CALC_00 will have a value of 1 0 because P1_CH 14 is greater than 23 P1_CH14 gt 23 was set in example 1 In our example 2 function of CALC_00 And P1_CH15 gt 24 it is clear that although the first condition is satisfied we can see that the second is not since P1_CH15 has a reading of 21 81 Because both conditions are not satisfied CALC_01 reads 0 0 Note that CALC_01 can be used in additional equations Example 3 P1 CH14 P1_CH1S Look at row 3 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen previous figure You will see that the user created a calculation function of P1_CH14 P1_CH15 for the calculation channel having the channel ID of CALC_02 In this exam
106. a PC e Communication with PC LogBook provides for serial and parallel port communication In the stand alone mode the PC Card must be manually transported between the PC and LogBook The PC Card is a memory device rotating or flash PCMCIA types I I or III that holds the system software and the acquired data in multiple formats System software includes the configuration file that directs a specific acquisition and LogBook s operating system The PC Card as programmed in LogView allows LogBook to operate without PC intervention if so desired LogView can configure a PC Card in LogBook if the PC and LogBook are electronically connected via serial or parallel port In a stand alone mode the PC Card must be physically transported between a PC with LogView and one or more LogBooks for uploading and downloading Using a 500 Mbyte PC Card for example you can store up to 250 million samples in non volatile memory that equates to more than forty minutes of recording time on one channel at the full 100 kHz acquisition rate For continuous data collection PC Cards can be swapped while the acquisition is taking place As one card becomes nearly full it can be removed and another card inserted without causing a gap in the acquired data The user s PC typically a laptop or desktop runs the supplied LogView software LogView s user interface includes a virtual instrument panel with meters and controls to fit various applications Through LogView
107. ach 4 Lk ee 7s screws to hold the rack to the LogBook ah O n 3 Attach cable RJ 11 side to the LBK1 and S DB9 side to the LogBook Note The mounting rack can be attached to other ES peo a equipment racks shelves or other support p A E ee 5 structures gt gt LBKI and Rack p n Mount Shown both Assembled bottom and Disassembled top Note Early Style LogBook Depicted LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 5 Control Panel Functions LBK1 Remote terminal for the LogBook Remote LogBook Terminal Main Menu System Time 2 Ty UL 7 2000 ims o 2s Acq State Snae Eor Erig Acq Name Test 1 i Acq Sys Chan ovis Term CONE State State Conf CONE LBK1 Remote Terminal Menu Select Keys Located just below the display screen these keys access the various menus On Turns power ON to the LogBook As an indication of power status legible characters or the LCD backlight shows that LogBook power is on Off Turns power OFF to the LogBook To prevent accidental shutdown the user must confirm the off request if so configured in the Terminal Configuration submenu Select up down Moves the cursor up and down menu to select a particular parameter or function Edit left right Views and selects among pre programmed parameter values Increases right or decreases left the numeric quantity Enter Resets parameter values as shown performs current operation Cancel
108. acquisition In these ways LogView gives you immediate access to LogBook operation e File Management includes managing data configuration files and converting data file formats The LogView Explorer window allows you to manage files on the PC Card Communication Communication between LogView and LogBook is actually between the PC and a PC Card During the communication the PC Card can reside in a LogBook for direct attached communication or in the PC s PC Card socket for indirect unattached communication and later manually transferred to LogBook Whether direct or indirect communication involves downloading and uploading e Downloading sends the acquisition setup file created in LogView s Setup mode to LogBook s PC Card LogBook uses the setup file to run the acquisition also needs Logbook sys e Uploading receives recorded data from LogBook s PC Card After the data has been collected and temporarily saved on LogBook s PC Card the data must be uploaded to LogView for processing conversion use in other programs and or archival saving In the Direct Attached Communication mode communication occurs through the electronic connection cabling via serial or parallel port While attached LogBook can do 2 point calibration look at current readings and download upload without handling the PC Card Note In some cases data transfer may be faster by placing LogBook s PC Card in the computer s PC Card socket and
109. ailable from Measurement Computing Refer to the associated Quick Start document QS RS 232 to USB Interface pdf for a list of the kit s contents and for RS 232 to USB conversion instructions The pdf is included on Data Acquisition CD rev 8 1 2 and higher d PC Card With PC Card communication LogBook 300 does not require a connection to the computer as communication is accomplished via the PC Card To provide the PC Card with the correct configuration file it must be configured from the PC through LogView After the PC Card is configured it is inserted into LogBook s PC Card slot located behind the front panel door S Reference Note Information pertaining to PC Cards can be found in chapter 1 and in the Log View section of the LogBook User s Manual PDF LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Qs300 3 2 Connect the LogBook 300 to the DBK cards and modules Most of the analog DBKs connect to P1 on the rear panel the digital DBKs generally connect to P2 Reference Note For DBK card related information refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF The document is included on the Data Acquisition CD and is also available on our web site Note The CA 37 x cable can daisy chain several DBKs including the DBK41 which has a built in P1 bus connection for 10 DBK cards The x in the cable part number refers to the number of devices that can be connected to a device for example a CA 37 1 cable has two DB 37 connectors one for connecting to the
110. ain a LogBook configuration that is setup for dial out capability e One modem must be connected to or installed within a host PC e One modem must be connected to the LogBook s RS 232 DB9 SERIAL COM connector LogView makes no distinction between locally connected LogBooks and those that are attached via modem For example Log View can upload data from a LogBook four feet away via serial port or from a LogBook that is located 2000 miles away via modem LogView provides a Windows Control Panel applet for configuring communication attributes of LogBook field units Note that a large number of LogBook connections can be assigned each with 1ts own set of communication parameters and custom user name The configuration for LogBook s PC Card is made through LogView The PC communication settings are made through the LogBook Control Panel configuration applet Once the configuration is complete you will need to download it to your PC Card This configuration download can be made in either of two ways 1 via the PC Card socket in your PC or 2 through a parallel port connection to your LogBook Both methods are explained in the LogView section of this user s manual Reference Note With modem support comes an application designed to automate the task of uploading data from one or several LogBooks This is application is referred to as the Upload Scheduler It is discussed on page 7 15 The remainder of this section for telephone
111. al conditioning type DBKs comes from a primary acquisition device such as a DaqBook 2000 Series device or LogBook or from a power card or module If needed the DBK32A or DBK33 can provide additional power to meet DBK power demands The DBK power supplies work off of low voltage DC that can come from an AC adapter or from a DC source such as a car battery e Demand for power comes from DBK cards and modules and in some systems from transducers You should use the DBK Power Requirement Worktable to calculate your system s power needs After completing the table compare the total power demand to the supply power e Distribution of power to most DBKs is via the P1 interface The DBK41 expansion chassis has a jumper to isolate 5 VDC power from P1 The Pl Pin designations are as follows Pin 1 5 VDC Pin 2 15 VDC Pin 21 15 VDC Pin 7 digital ground Pin 28 analog ground Pin 29 analog ground Note Certain DBK modules have their own internal power supplies and require only 10 VDC to 20 VDC LogBook The LogBook with no DBKs attached uses approximately 12 Watts of power If using battery power you can compute operational endurance from your battery s wattxhr rating and the following calculation tables DaqBoard 2000 Series Boards DaqBoard 2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard 2000c Series Boards use 3 5 watts of power 700 mA 5 VDC from their host computer Power consumption can be up to 10 W with external accessories Avoi
112. and lt Download gt buttons If a large quantity of data will be recorded you should return to the remote LogBook in time to swap PC Cards before the first card is full Card swapping is discussed in the introduction chapter of the user s manual All PC Cards to be swapped must first be initialized as discussed in the previous section Simple Data Logging To log data you need to configure the hardware set up the channels and configure the acquisition parameters The following steps are generic and will vary with different applications LV 14 LogView L Launch LogView and Attach LogView to your Logbook if working in an attached mode or to a PC Card inserted in your PC if working in a remote unattached mode see previous 2 procedures if necessary Select New under the File menu or the new file button see figure at right and give the acquisition setup file a name relevant to your application i Click the Analog lt Input gt button to display the setup grid in the Analog Input Channel Configuration window Turn all but the Ist 4 channels off or as applicable by placing the cursor in the On Off column and double clicking to toggle the setting on and off ey unused channels that are left ON will limit the maximum scan rate possible To change Input the Range for a particular channel click the cursor on the affected and then use the drop down user input box to select an appropriate range can be bipolar or unipolar
113. apter on power management Check the README TXT file for information that may not have been available at the s time this manual went to press LogBook User s Manual 989492 vV vi This page is intentionally blank 989492 LogBook User s Manual Table of Contents Chapter 1 An Introduction to LogBook LogBook Basics 1 1 What are LogBooks 1 1 Front and Rear Panels 1 2 Highlight of Features 1 3 LogBook 300 Block Diagram 1 4 LogBook 360 Block Diagram 1 5 The Use of PC Cards with LogBook 1 6 System Software 1 7 Operational Features 1 9 Data Acquisition An Overview 1 9 LogBook System File Must be on the PC Card 1 10 Communications 1 10 Triggering and Scan Timing 1 11 Scan Rate Limitations 1 11 Use of Outputs to Alarm and Control 1 13 Acquisition 1 13 Data Storage and Retrieval 1 13 Specifications 1 15 QS300 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Includes Installation Procedure QS360 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Includes Installation Procedure Chapter 4 System Expansion Expansion and Enhancement Options 4 1 What are LBK Options 4 1 What are DBK Options 4 2 Power Options 4 3 Other Options 4 3 Considerations 4 4 DBK Configuration 4 4 Dimensional and Environmental Factors 4 4 Mechanical Setup Options 4 5 P1 P2 P3 Port Connectors
114. aracter Data Too Long 148 Character Data Not Allowed 150 String Data Error 151 Invalid String Data 154 String Data Too Long 158 String Data Not Allowed 160 Block Data Error 161 Invalid Block Data 168 Block Data Not Allowed 170 Expression Command Error 171 Invalid Expression 178 Expression Data Not Allowed 180 Macro Definition Error 183 Invalid Inside Macro Definition 184 Macro Parameter Command Error Execution Error Definitions 200 Execution Error 201 Invalid While In Local 202 Settings Lost Due To RTL 203 Command Protected 210 Trig Error 211 Trig Ignored 212 Arm lgnored 213 Init Ignored 214 Trig Deadlock 215 Arm Deadlock 220 Parameter Error 221 Settings Conflict 222 Data Out Of Range 223 Too Much Data 224 Illegal Parameter Value 225 Operation Out Of Memory 230 Lists Not Same Length 231 Data Corrupt Or Stale 232 Data Questionable 233 Invalid Format LogBook User s Manual 918200 240 241 250 251 252 253 204 255 256 257 258 260 261 2 0 271 272 273 274 2 5 2 6 2 7 278 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 290 291 292 293 294 Invalid Version Hardware Error Hardware Missing Mass Storage Error Missing Media Corrupt Media Media Full Directory Full File Name Not Found File Name Error Media Protected Expression Error MathError In Expression Macro Error Macro Syntax Error Macro Execution Error Illegal Macro Label Macro Parameter Error Macro Definition Too Long Macro Recursion Error Macr
115. ard s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on the interconnect board and gently press them together see figure B Mount the DBK card with two screws into the standoffs on the card drawer see previous figure C Continue installation of any remaining DBK cards 10 Connect internal signals Connect signal inputs from DBK cards to termination panels DBK cards connect to the termination panels in various ways see figure and particular DBK sections in the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual e Single ended connections use analog common e Differential connections require the proper polarity typically red to red for high and black to black for low e For thermocouples red is generally the low side Always make sure the T C connector and wire type match the T C type used BNC Connector TIC Connector Safety Jack Connector Safety Jack Connectors High Single ended use Differential use Low connects to analog common not shown Termination Panel internal side Termination Panel internal side Red Yi High Termination Panel external side SIS Sa Termination Panel Ka internal side Low 11 Install termination panels Mount the termination panels to the card drawer with two screws for each panel 12 Install card drawer The card drawer slides into the bottom track of the chassis A Hold the card drawer by its handle and tilt it up slightly
116. are located under the LCD display their programmed function is shown in the bottom row of the LCD display Numeric keys are available for entering various parameters in a signed decimal format Other keys are used to initiate the manual trigger mark events navigate the menu enter cancel settings and turn the system on and off e The LBK1 has a beeper to confirm keystrokes there are no LEDs e The LBK1 has one connector an RJ11 that attaches to the LogBook s DB9 connector via the supplied cable The supplied cable is 2 ft long Cable options include a coiled retractable cable 6 ft max and a shielded 3 ft cable to comply with CE standards Cable lengths up to a maximum of 100 ft from LogBook can be used e No batteries are required LBK1 power comes from the LogBook e An optional LBK1 mount can be attached to LogBook for convenient mounting of the LBK1 module e The size of the LBK1 is 7 875 x 4 375 x 1 125 in 200 x 111 x 29 mm Capabilities LBK1 s capabilities and limitations are highlighted in the following table Note that although LBK1 provides many LogBook functions it does not provide the degree of control that can be obtained by using a PC and LogView Capabilities The LBK1 can Limitations The LBK1 cannot Indicate LogBook power status acquisition state and system Set up a new acquisition configuration errors View charts and graphs Provide the user with control to start stop an acquisition to Perform
117. at a modem is set for Base operation enter the commands and reset the baud rate in this order Type sp00 press lt Enter gt This sets the protocol mode to point to point transparent mode Type wb1 press lt Enter gt This sets the modem unit for Base Local operation Type zb0 press lt Enter gt Disables the Banner Display Type m gt press lt Enter gt This is the Save command Type sd01 press lt Enter gt Sets the Baud Rate to 115200 a aS A MA In the Baud Rate Box lower right of screen change the baud rate to 115200 as indicated in the following figure 7 Type m gt press lt Enter gt This is the Save command Configuration Mode 1 Base unit 0 Remote unit default BTR DSR RTS CTS DCD TX 7 o F eo Canto Mee Baud Rate Set for 115200 Tronsmi Sting a m atan Toom Stop DTA ATS MOTA FATS F3Con g Fe Echo PFb Transmii F Binan WinCom24 Setting a Modem for Base Operation A 8 Supplement HopNet Modems 887997 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A Setting a Modem for Remote Operation HopNet Modems have a factory default setting for being Remote units You can ensure that the unit is set for Remote by entering the following commands In order to enter these commands successful completion of steps listed in the section Getting Started with WinCOM24 is required To ensure that a modem is set for Remote operat
118. ata Acquisition System Prior planning will go a long way towards optimizing your acquisition setup and will most likely save you time Dimensional and Environmental Factors Before setting up your LogBook based acquisition system you should consider the following size and environmental related factors LogBook 300 Dimensions 81 2 x 11 x 1 3 4 in 216 x 279 x 44 mm This enclosure has the same footprint as the DBK modules for easy stacking of units LogBook 360 Dimensions 14 x 11 x 3 7 16 in 330 x 279 x 84 mm The width 11 provides for convenient stacking of DBK modules Operating temperature humidity 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C 0 to 95 RH non condensing Operation of the unit in environments exceeding these limits requires that a temperature regulated enclosure Storage temperature 40 to 176 F 40 to 80 C The standard case is rugged but not designed for immersion Special enclosures are available for harsh environments All connectors including the power connector are locking The D sub connectors have thumbscrews and the DINS power connector has a twist lock ring to ensure solid connections are maintained Mechanical Setup Options DBK modules for packaging DBK expansion cards are available with three slots DBK10 DBK60 or 10 slots DBK41 The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system For three or fewer cards you can use the stackable 3 slot DBK10 or 3 slot DBK60 Note DB
119. ata stream that may be useless in some applications Exception capturing is useful where continuous data would soon fill up the PC Card with low value data 1 Click the lt Acq gt Acquisition Configuration button to open the Acquisition Configuration window 2 Setup the trigger parameter as required The trigger can be set to various parameters including the level of an analog input channel where you can select a threshold and hysteresis with rising or falling edge Trigger sources include analog input level digital channel immediate absolute time and manual Event Mark 20d When in the Manual mode to enable the lt Event Mark gt buttons on the LogBook Monitor window and on LBK1 you must select the Enable Event Mart checkbox in the Acquisition Configuration window See the following figure Acquisition Configuration F Infinite Rearms Humber of Re arme o M Enable Event Mark Enable Time Stamp I Trigger Block Definition Pre trigger Trigger Post trigger Source Manual Manual Digital Channel Analog Channel GPS Channel Calculated Channel Absolute Time Scan Rate f Internal Clock Max Frequency 16 666 kHz f External Clock n Appi maose reduction averaging A Y Baze Rate 4 i 0 1 Rateb M 2o msec 2 Raet D 4 0 msec E Rate Dr F fan msec E Setting Up the Trigger Parameter 3 In the Pre trigger tab set up a duration of time occurring before the trigger event that you
120. bypassing the attached communication Configure Acquisition a Save data Serial or Parallel Communication Serial or Parallel ommunication Upload Send Data and Setup File From Attached LogBook To LogView PC PC card residing PC card residing in LogBook in LogBook Co ar ne Direct Downloading and Uploading With Attached PC Download Send Setup File From LogView PC To Attached LogBook In the Indirect Unattached Communication mode no electrical connection exists between the PC and LogBook A PC Card carrying the setup file and or data must be physically transported between the PC and LogBook Note The LBK1 remote operation terminal can be used with an unattached LogBook for limited control and monitoring The LBK1 option is detailed in chapter 5 of the LogBook User s Manual Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 3 Configure Acquisition Save data u gt Download al Upload a a Send Setup File x Send Data and Setup File From LogView PC 7 From Unattached LogBook To Unattached LogBook To LogView PC a o T User physically User physically e moves PC card A LogBook moves PC card from PC e from LogBook into LogBook t 4 into PC ta ena a Pron Banana gt Indirect Downloading and Uploading With Unattached PC LogView Features and Capabilities In setting up an acquisition Log View can e Configure parameters for all input output and calculated channels wit
121. c value if Increment the Decrement the selected can be value by clicking value by clicking typed in the up arrow the down arrow moec Spinner activated when cursor is between Units selected by Increment and Decrement arrows Drag pull down menu spinner left mouse button pressed up or down to change value User set parameters can be set individually per channel or the same value can be filled down for an entire column To apply the same column setting to multiple channels use the spreadsheet s fill down feature Select multiple cells in a column by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button or using the Shift and arrow keys Enable the fill down feature with the right mouse button As a shortcut to toggle channel readings on or off you can place the cursor in the Reading column and double click the mouse Another alternative is to double click the column title and every channel value in the column will change to the next value if such a value is list selectable Globally you can switch all channel readings in the Indicators menu as Start All Indicators and Stop All Indicators For program windows that exhibit an lt Apply gt button note that parameter changes will not be locked in until the lt Apply gt button has been pressed clicked File Management LV 8 LogView uses various types of files for its operation e System logbook sys is the file that actually operates LogBook The file must reside on th
122. can also interact with LogBook using the LBK1 Remote Terminal Panel option discussed in the LBK chapter The LBK1 option provides limited LogBook control without use of the LogView program As can be seen from the following PC Card Compatibility information some PC Cards should be avoided in regard to use with LogBook Note during operation LogView is the primary system interface for control and configuration PC Card Compatibility with LogBook Operation To work properly the LogBook requires compatible PC Card memory You can purchase 100 compatible cards through your LogBook sales representative If you prefer to buy your card from another source make sure it is an ATA style memory card Also make sure the card s memory capacity is sufficient for your purpose You can change PC Cards to load setup files replace full cards or transport data to an unattached PC When the PC Card door is opened a detector starts a preparatory routine to clean up files on the installed disk Within a few seconds a green LED indicates it is safe to swap PC Cards Swapping should be done quickly to prevent gaps in the recorded data 4 MB RAM provides about 10 seconds at 100 kHz and 1 75 minutes at 10 kHz 16 MB RAM provides over a minute at 100 kHz and about 12 minutes at 10 kHz for one channel scans 1 6 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual Internal PC Card socket insert card carefully to ensure good connection and prevent pin damage
123. ces the value 1 if both operands have nonzero values If either operand is equal to 0 the result is O If the first operand of a logical AND operation is equal to 0 the second operand is not evaluated OR The logical OR operator performs an inclusive OR operation on its operands The result is O if both operands have O values If either operand has a nonzero value the result is 1 If the first operand of a logical OR operation has a nonzero value the second operand is not evaluated The operands of logical AND and logical OR expressions are evaluated from left to right If the value of the first operand is sufficient to determine the result of the operation the second operand is not evaluated This is called short circuit evaluation NOT The logical negation logical NOT operator produces the value 0 if its operand is true nonzero and the value if its operand is false 0 The operand must be an integral floating or pointer value 989592 LogView LV 39 LV 40 Examples of Calculated Channels LogView Example 1 P1_CH14 gt 23 In this example the user wants to use CALC_00 as a logic indicator based on the state of physical channel P1_CH14 thus channel CALC_00 will read 1 or 0 depending on the value of the physical channel s reading The user created a calculation function P1_CH14 gt 23 The calculation channel is labeled CALC_00 as seen in the following figure Assume P1_CH14 had a reading of 26 13 Since 26 13 is gr
124. chassis ground with the hardware provided e The host computer must be properly grounded e In low level analog applications some inaccuracy is to be expected when I O leads are exposed to RF fields or transients over 3 or 10 V m as noted on the Declaration of Conformity CE Enhancements for Existing Products This section describes three CE enhancements e DBK41 CE e Edge Guards for the DBK5 DBK8 and DBK44 e BNC Connectors for CE compliance Edge Guards for DBK5 DBK8 and DBK44 A plastic barrier attached to the end of a DBK card helps prevent access to leads and to live circuits The edge guards attach to DBKs see figure below that are mounted in a DBK41 CE with EMI shield plates The access slot allows insulated wires to pass through the barrier Edge Guard Access Waming Label Edge Guard 405 2001 Slot 280 2000 DBK44 Self tapping Screws Lua long HA 115 Fig 1 Edge Guard Kit for DBK5 and DBK8 Fig 2 Edge Guard Kit for DBK44 p n 232 0806 pin 232 0805 DBK41 CE The DBK41 CE includes 3 variations of EMI shield plates that attach to the DBK41 enclosure Besides acting as an electrical safety barrier these shields reduce electromagnetic interference EMI Note The CE kit is included with the DBK41 CE It can be purchased as an optional accessory for use with DBK41 LogBook User s Manual 949297 CE Compliance 8 3 Cover Screw Shield Plate Shield Plate Shield Plate for DBKs for Empty Slot
125. ck on one of the following options e Apply to store the device configuration Parameters are not locked in until you click the Apply button If you make changes and don t click Apply clicking the Test button in Test Hardware will yield unexpected errors e OK to store the configuration and exit the current property screen e Cancel to exit the current screen without storing any changes Test Hardware to test the current device 3 LogBook Configuration LogBook Properties Port Settings Test Hardware Bits per second 3600 a Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control LogBook Properties Tab LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide 34 LogBook Configuration LogBook Properties Test Hardware Prior to testing please make sure pour device if connected to the PC IF your computer does not respond for 30 seconds please reboot and change the settings in the configuration utility Test Results DEVICE ONLINE Performance Test Download Speed gt 34060 bytes sec Upload Speed gt 42314 bytes sec Test Hardware Tab QS360 9 Testing the Hardware Before testing LogBook 360 a Verify the device has been properly installed b Make sure the communication cable serial or parallel is firmly in place to the proper ports c Verify the device is powered on Testing the LogBook 360 device might cause the system to hang If test results are not displayed within 30 seconds or if the system does no
126. d as the base channels DBKs can be daisy chained off the P1 connector of LogBook or an expansion module Some DBKs add another level of multiplexing and programmable gain to each channel and setting channel parameters properly sometimes requires both hardware and software setup e P2 The Digital I O port can accommodate the DBK20 21 digital I O cards DBK23 24 isolated digital input output chassis DBK25 8 channel relay card and other compatible devices up to 208 digital I O lines e P3 The Pulse Frequency port can be used for analog output and other uses A DBK11A provides for easy signal connection via screw terminals or optional BNC connectors The following figure illustrates various expansion possibilities Note that additional options exist DBK options are detailed in the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 DBK23 24 attach to the LogBook via P2 for isolated digital input output DBK25 CA 37 x ribbon cable daisy chains several DBKs to P1 P2 P3 Relay the x indicates the number of expansion ports in the cable s chain Card on P2 DBK41 DBK41 DBK11A attaches P3 to miscellaneous devices via BNCs or screw terminals E nn L TEPC re reer Ctr AAA AA TA AAA an Each DBK41 can hold up to 10 DBK cards e g a DBK324 33 power supply and 9 additional DBK cards DBK10 To power source TR 43 or DBK34 etc Additional power may be needed for mutiple high load DBKs
127. d mode insert PA Vag A pre configured PC Card TERMINAL SERIAL COM SERIAL GPS SERIAL AUX sove ops lp Easy O TRIGGERED o Rotary Switch a ACTIVE A m ia j PC Card Slot POWER Di a i216 lt Safe Swap LED 10 TO 45 VDC 5 x R i se 5 E P3 PULSE FREQUENCY 1 ANALOG 1 0 vO HIGH SPEED DIGITAL VO puan Mm AY Step 2 Connect DBK options to LogBook Use CA 37 x cable x is the number of devices to be connected Connect analog inputs to P1 digital to P2 pulse to P3 Step 1 Connect LogBook s SERIAL or PARALLEL port to the corresponding PC port DBK card ce t Step 3 Connect DBK options to transducers The use of channel labels is recommended especially for complex systems Note A When used the LogBook Terminal option LBK1 connects to LogBook s TERMINAL port If LBK1 is not used a remote ON OFF switch and LED indicator option can be connected to LogBook via the TERMINAL port LBK options are detailed in the LBK chapter of the user s manual LogBook 360 System Attached Mode Basic Connections Note Rear panel connections may be made via terminal blocks as discussed in the previous section Card Drawer Setup After verifying that all equipment power is off hardware connection typically proceeds as follows Refer to the above figure as needed 1 Connect the LogBook 360 to the host PC There are four ways for LogBook 360 to communicate with
128. d multiple PC Cards allow the system to handle complex data acquisition environments with a large number of data files LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 1 Front and Rear Panels Note Descriptions of panel items appear on the following page Power Q y 060 power in O ERROR O TRIGGERED O ACTIVE TERMINAL SERIAL COM SERIAL GPS SERIAL AUR z pp F fep To LBK1 To PC OR MODEM R x otary Switch T PC Card Slot IF WI NA10 lt Safe Swap LED 10 TO 45 VDC 55W MAX P1 Blank Panel DBK601 5 6 1 1 y 7 ki K E Gel Gs i 22 1 i 1 Ija KaKa BA mk 9K e EE 20165015315 I I I 1 I 1 11 111 I k eh ee A co K T C Connectors Differential DBK605 B DBK605 R DBK605 J DBK605 S DBK605 K DBK605 T BNC Connectors plus Analog Common DBK602 Safety Jacks Single ended plus Analog Common DBK603 Safety Jacks Differential plus Analog Common DBK604 DB37 Connectors Female DBK608 Terminal Blocks 16 connections each DBK606 Strain Relief Clamp DBK607 LogBook 360 Terminal Panels A combination of 3 make up the rear panel POWER TERMINAL SERIAL COM Gass jes O ERROR TRIGGERED Rot Switch ory Swich PC Card Slot ACTIVE A z Tee IW1 lt Safe Swap LED LogBook 300 Front Panel Note In earlier models the PC Card Door has a right edge hinge not shown P1 ANALOG I O 1 2 An Introduction to LogBook P3 PULSE F
129. d power cycling the host PC Wait 10 seconds after powering down the host PC before powering it back on This will allow any residual voltages to decay enabling the DaqBoard 2000 Series or 2000c Series board to start up in a known good state DaqBook 100 Series amp 200 Series DaqBoard ISA and Daq PC Card If using power from AC mains through adapter you need not worry about Daq device power use If using battery power you can compute operational endurance from the battery s wattxhr rating and power tables Daq PC Card and DaqBoard use power from their host PC DaqBook 100 and DaqBook 200 Series devices use no power from the PC but do require DC voltage from an AC to DC adapter or another suitable source Voltage needs are as follows e 7 to 20 VDC for DaqBook 100 DaqBook 112 and DaqBook 120 e 10 to 24 VDC for DaqBook 216 e 9to 18 VDC for DaqBook 200 and DaqBook 260 Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA Europe Japan and Asia pg 16 DBK Basies 9e798 Tag Systems DaqBook 2000 Series Devices If using power from AC mains through adapter you need not worry about Daq device power use If using battery power you can compute operational endurance from the battery s wattxhr rating and power tables DaqBook 2000 Series devices use no power from the PC but do require DC voltage from an AC to DC adapter with a supply range of 10 VDC to 30 VDC or another suitable DC source Various AC adapter mod
130. dems can be connected by cable the more popular versions make use of radio frequency RF communications to eliminate the need for a cable between the PC and LogBook From the standpoint of the PC and LogBook a communication link via short haul modems looks exactly like a connection made via standard serial port In other words the use of short haul modems is transparent to the PC and LogBook This transparent aspect is not true for telephone type modems LogBook Short haul Short haul Modem Modem Short haul Modems Cable Type 1 km a e LogBook al LAE Modem Modem Short haul Modems Radio Frequency Transmitter Type The configuration for LogBook s PC Card is made through LogView The PC communication settings are made through the LogBook Control Panel configuration applet Under default conditions when the PC attempts to communicate with the LogBook via its serial port the LogBook will initiate an auto baud sequence that adopts the baud rate of the PC Short haul modems are typically unable to properly negotiate the LogBook s auto baud sequence on the RS 232 port so the LogBook will need to be setup in fixed baud mode Once the configuration is complete you will need to download it to your PC Card This configuration download can be made in either of two ways 1 via the PC Card socket in your PC or 2 through a parallel port connection to your LogBook Both methods are explained in the Log View section
131. device J1bkTAPIOutput sending data l1bkTAPIEnter receiving data 1bkTAPIOnline verify device is online When a Device Opens the System Opens a connection status dialog box Verifies TAPI compatibility tapi d11 is part of the installation Checks that the modem is present and ready Calls the remote modem Waits for the ring back Negotiates connection speed and other parameters Sets the connection handle and returning connection status Closes the connection status dialog box that was opened in step 1 LS aS Se Note Connection dialog will display text corresponding to each status phase Note At any time during the connection process you can terminate the call by clicking the Cancel button in the Connection Status dialog box In this case the 1bkTAPIOpen function will return the corresponding error ERR_TAPIOPEN_CANCELED_BY_USER In addition to cancellation by the user a connection could fail because of the following busy signal no dial tone modem offline wrong number remote modem not in auto answer mode remote LogBook offline In these cases the error is indicated by connection dialog and returned to the calling application Note Closing the device includes dropping the call and freeing all modem resources LogBook Modem Specifications Supported Modems Hayes Compatible Maximum Baud Rate 115K baud LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Sched
132. ding reliable power these DBKs have proven convenient in laboratory automotive and field applications Input power for these devices can come from any 10 to 20 VDC source or from an AC source via an appropriate AC to DC adapter A brief synopsis of the DBK power options follows Refer to the respective document modules for complete information DBK30A 4 4 4 E BATTERY MODULE A A DBK30A module provides power at 14 and 28 VDC with a rated capacity of 3 4 A hr E 14 VDC The DBK30A s 28 V output will power 4 to 20 mA transducers The module s rechargeable power supply can power DBK modules in situations where AC mains are not available Note Some transducers e g 2 wire 4 20 mA transmitters bridge configured sensors etc require an excitation voltage in order to work properly The DBK30A supplies 14 and 28 VDC Consult transducer documentation before applying power DBK32A provides 15 VDC E 500 mA DBK33 provides 15 VDC E 250 mA and 5 VDC E 1000 mA The DBK32A and DBK33 power cards attach directly to the P1 analog expansion bus where they supply power to DBK analog expansion cards The DBK32A and the DBK33 can be powered from an included AC adapter an optional DBK30A battery module or from a 10 to 20 VDC source such as a car battery When installed in a DBK10 three slot expansion chassis the DBK32A or DBK33 supplies power to the analog DBK that 1s to receive power via a CA 37 x cable If used with the DBK41
133. dow and can be referred to as needed File Menu New Open Save Save As Download Upload Download As Configuration Report About Log View Authorization Exit New k LV 24 LogView The File menu helps manage your data and configuration files You can determine the file format as well as how and where the files are saved in memory As stated in the previous reference note The File Management section of this document module beginning on page LV 8 contains detailed information regarding filename structure gt Use code ED7B55484273 to authorize complete functionality The New command allows you to create a new file If you try to leave a configuration not yet saved dialog box asks how Do you want to save the current configuration select Yes No or Cancel The Save Save As window will appear Several icons in the top right of the window offer you help in navigating through files and levels of folders The Open command allows you open a previously created configuration file Ipen LogYiew Configuration File ge Logyiew Co Cancel we file LY C 989592 Software Reference Save The Save command allows you to store the configuration file you are currently working on The Save As command uses the same window as the Save command and allows you to enter a new mj file name The current file remains unchanged from its last save Save As Pull down to browse available Up One Level Create
134. e or help to clarify an issue Tips may include additional reference Specifications and Calibration Specifications are subject to change without notice Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to the manual As applicable the hardware is calibrated to published specifications Periodic hardware calibration is not covered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual Improper calibration procedures may void the warranty CAUTION Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause personal injury or equipment damage Before setting up and using your equipment you should read all documentation that covers your system Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Initial navigation is as follows Start Desktop Start pull down menu gt Programs gt gt IOtech LogBook Software You can also access the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD by using the lt View PDFs gt button located on the opening screen Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software Y our order was carefully inspected prior to shipment When you receive your system carefu
135. e Close button may be used at any time to exit the LogBook Configuration applet The second configuration window displays the properties for the selected LogBook 300 Fields include LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide QS300 5 e Device Name is displayed with the default name numbered successively as configured This field can be changed to any descriptive name as desired e Connection Type can be serial or parallel port e Device Connection specifies the port name e Protocol is used to set the parallel port protocol ECP only or serial protocol RS 232 or RS 485 e Device Timeout specifies the number of seconds LogView will be wait for a LogBook response before displaying an error condition ECP Parallel Port nel To use parallel port communication with an attached LogBook 300 your PC must y support the ECP protocol AND be set in the ECP mode The majority of today s PCs support the Enhanced Computer Port protocol ECP If your computer does not support ECP you can communicate with the LogBook 300 via the RS 232 serial port or you can add an ECP compatible ISA board or PC Card parallel port Setting the PC to ECP mode varies with different computers On some computers you can enter the BIOS Setup utility from Windows Settings or during startup by pressing the F1 function key The Parallel Port Mode property can be found under the Peripheral Configuration group menu item If necessary consult your PC s documentation or your PC s manu
136. e DAT pl DADISP F filename DAT filename HED ie POSTVIEW filename IOT filename 1O 989592 Software Reference Data Filename Generation Uploading can create one data file or many data files A simple completed data collection with one timebase will produce only one data file More complex conditions will create multiple data files When these conditions exist LogView creates a file set rather than a single file These configurations will create multiple data files during an upload e With multiple timebases enabled LogView generates a separate file for each rate e With Auto Re arm set greater than 0 multiple trigger blocks will be collected each in a separate file These events will generate multiple file sets e When LogBook configuration is re armed through LogView or by cycling LogBook s power a new file set is created e When a partial upload takes place with an attached LogBook a new file set is created e When a partial upload takes place from a PC Card in the PC s socket a new file set is created A partial upload saves part of the data from an active acquisition Three ways to perform a partial upload a During an acquisition connect your PC to LogBook and execute an upload To make room for additional data the uploaded data is deleted from the PC Card b During an acquisition swap the PC Card in LogBook with a different card Then insert the card into your PC and perform an upload c Start an upload of any
137. e Each row is a different channel Individually controlled channels can be hardware based or calculated channels can be identified with user specified labels e Each column is a parameter related to the channel Some parameters can be user set user label sample rate etc others are read only physical channel readings from transducers etc Note Generally cells that are grayed out rather than black are not subject to user input e g physical channel channel type however grayed out Sample Rates under the Storage tab can be changed in the Acquisition Configuration Window LV 6 LogView 989592 Software Reference Channel Configuration Enter channel label Storage DEK Parameters User Scaling Point Cal ate ne Physical User Label On Off Reading Range Units Channel Channel Type a F CH0 P1 CHOQ Un 10 0 to 10 0 Volt Local a P1 CHO P1_ CHOI On 10 0 to 10 0 Volk Local ESA P1 Er CH02 Pi CHO On 10 0 to 10 0 Volk Local m A o E User specitied channel label 16 characters maximum Type in desired label or leave default Analog Input Channel Configuration Window Spreadsheet Portion LogView s spreadsheet style setup provides a simple method of both viewing and configuring the parameters of the input output and calculated channels Several spreadsheets are needed to display all the channels parameters LogView s spreadsheet windows include e Analog Input Channel Configuration see page LV 30 for
138. e PC Card in LogBook in order for the system to power on and work properly All PC Cards used with LogBook need to have the logbook sys file e Setup Acquisition Configuration The filename extension for the acquisition setup file is LVC from LogView Configuration This file is downloaded to LogBook s PC Card The file contains parameter details for a particular acquisition as configured in LogView When swapping PC Cards in a remote LogBook the new PC Card should have the same LVC file e Data Names for the data files use a long format convention as described below The Preferences window from the View pull down menu allows you to customize how your data files will be named File Organization LogView and then converts them into the formats specified in the Preferences ae ee window The raw binary files are placed in the DATA directory in the logbook sys ns a f logview ini path specified during a configuration save If the configuration was logview exs never saved the DATA directory will be created in the Log View splash bmp working directory ary flename BIN E i filename DSC LogView creates a sub directory within DATA for each file format i p DIADEM selected The figure to the right represents a typical file structure pr ho if ASCII filename TXT E As data is uploaded to the PC Log View first uploads the raw data file s filename TXS filename SMA filenam
139. e can be changed or modified from the corresponding properties window To do so double click the device icon or single click the device and then single click the Properties button The second configuration window will appear for the selected device as shown in the previous figure e Add Device The Add Device button is used to add a device configuration whenever a new device is added to the system LogView cannot recognize a device unless listed in the configuration window e Remove The Remove button is used to remove a device from the configuration A device may be removed if it is no longer installed or if the device s configuration no longer applies e Close The Close button may be used at any time to exit the LogBook Configuration applet The second configuration window displays the properties for the selected LogBook Fields include e Device Name is displayed with the default name numbered successively as configured This field can be changed to any descriptive name as desired e Connection Type can be serial or parallel port e Device Connection specifies the port name e Protocol is used to set the parallel port protocol ECP only or serial protocol RS 232 or RS 485 e Device Timeout specifies the number of seconds LogView will be wait for a LogBook response before displaying an error condition LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide ECP Parallel Port N tel To use parallel port communication with an attached LogBook 360 your PC
140. e channel If the serial device supplies three parameters and all three are to be collected then three serial channels must be configured When a GPS or time of day TOD parameter is required simply select the associated cell in the Channel Type column of the grid then select the desired parameter from the drop down list When an integer float or character is to be parsed from a serial input string a format string must be formulated GPS Serial Input Channel Configuration S1_LatDeg F A AA A SER_CHOO On Degrees lt Not Applicable gt Mg SER_CHo1 SER_CHO1 On Minutes S1_LatMin lt Not Applicable SER_CHO2 Minutes TOD_Min _ lt Not Applicable gt SER_CHO3 Hours TOD_Hour lt Not Applicable gt MS ser_cHos SER_CHO4 Days TOD_Day _ lt Not Applicable gt ME SER_CHO5 SER_CHOS S1_Float f CHOG SER_CHOG CHO SER_CHO E Z cco runo cco runo mee C1 Cla vt Waa hla hla hla The simplest format string can be used if the serial device simply sends one parameter terminated by a CR and or LF For example a scale might send the following 12 32 lt CR gt lt LF gt 13 23 lt CR gt lt LF gt 13 44 lt CR gt lt LF gt 12 65 lt CR gt lt LF gt LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 7 In this case the simple format string f would instruct the LogBook to start at the 1 character in th
141. e material you can write out the steps to setup a system that will best meet your specific application needs 1 The end use of the acquisition data should be used to determine how you set up and program your acquisition system Prior to creating the system you should understand its layout and know how you are going to assign the channels If you can answer the following questions you are off to a good start If not you need to find the answers e What engineering units ranges sampling rates etc are best for your data e Will the data be charted graphically statistically processed or exported to other programs e How will the data be used e How will the data be saved e What are the system power requirements Using several DBKs or transducers that require excitation current may require an extra power supply e g a DBK32A 2 Assign channel numbers 3 Plan the location of transducers cable runs DBKs the acquisition device LogBook or Daq device and the computer Label your transducers cables and connectors to prevent later confusion Daq Systems 4 See ot AN 11 12 13 14 15 16 When configuring your LogBook or Daq device s consider the following e LogBook calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software however some DBKs may require manual calibration e The DaqBook 100 Series and DaqBook 200 Series devices and DaqBoards ISA type have internal jumpers and switches t
142. e serial input string sentence It would then begin the conversion to a floating point number until a character was encountered that could not be converted If a lI for integer was used instead of f the LogBook would record 12 instead of 12 32 Format String Reference The format string provides instructions to the LogBook s internal parser allowing it to parse then to convert numerically a specified section of an ASCII string from a serial device The format string contains directives for accepting and rejecting parts of the string Only one section of each ASCII string can be accepted and converted for each serial channel The parsing and converting process begins when the LogBook senses the serial input string sentence a string from the serial device that is terminated by a CR and or LF Each enabled Serial Channel will attempt to parse the entire serial input string To successfully parse and convert a number or character in a string all of the characters up to the desired field must be accounted for in the format string The first character encountered that does not match the format string will cause the parsing operation to fail with no conversion process The serial channel associated with a failed parsing operation will remain unchanged Each format string contains directives to ignore all the characters except those of interest A format string can contain several optional ignore directives but must contain one and only one
143. e value for analog channel source Sys Acq State Arm Time displays the arming time of the acquisition State Acquisition State Acq State shows acquisition status waiting for trigger armed or triggered Read only shows system status and Pre Trig Scans lists the number of pre trigger scans already completed resources Post Trig Scans lists the number of post trigger scans already completed Trigger Blocks lists the number of trigger blocks already completed and stored with current configuration file Disk Space Avail lists the number of bytes available on the PC card Disk Space Used lists the number of bytes saved to the PC card CPU Usage shows the percentage of the LogBook s CPU that is currently being used by the process Error Number provides a number for error identification Error String identifies the string that contains the error Error Count lists the number of unread errors Chan Channel Status User Label lists channels by user designated labels State Read Only Reading lists the latest reading received from that channel i channels are listed with their values Units lists the dimensional units of the reading e g Volts PSI DegC and units The soft keys in this menu are used as follows AnIN Chans to display active analog channels and their current readings If multiple pages are used to list DigIN Chans to display active digital channels and their current readings channels each page is number
144. eater than the value 23 in the calculation function CALC_00 s reading would appear as 1 0 If the channel P1_CH14 reading drops to 23 or lower CALC_00 will read 0 0 Note that CALC_00 can be used in additional equations as will be seen in example 2 To obtain a calculation channel select the Calculated Channel Configuration window s Edit pull down menu then select Add Channel In regard to the calculation function column the following steps highlight how to enter the function used in this first example i e P1_CH14 gt 23 1 Ensure the physical channel to be referenced is enabled In this case P1_CH14 Use the Calc y fx button in the toolbar or Calculated Channels from the View pull down menu to access the Calculated Channel Configuration Window 3 Select the Edit pull down menu located on the Calculated Channel Configuration window 4 Select Add New to add a calculation channel In our first example this is CALC_00 5 Click on the cell in the Calculation Function Column A F x button appears by the Enter Function Expression dialog box 6 Use the F x button to access the Equation Assistance dialog box 7 Inthe Equation Assistant box double click on the desired reference channel P1_CH14 This entry will appear in the equation box located just below the title bar Note that you may type the channel and other equation entries in this box if desired 8 From the Relational and Equality buttons lt gt lt gt
145. eck the LogBook Monitor screen for error messages A list of Software and Hardware related error codes is included near the end of the manual 1 12 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual Use of Outputs to Alarm and Control Acquisition S Reference Note For information on how LogView allows you to set outputs based on user defined conditions refer to the LogView document module s section entitled Calculated Channel Configuration By careful setup of LogBook s analog and digital outputs you can control external devices and or stimulate the unit under test Using LogView s calculated channels equations can be derived that can be used to stimulate digital outputs for use as alarms or for on off control For example the equation DIG1 CH1 CH2 lt 2 turns on digital output if the difference between channels 1 and 2 is less than 2 The system s four 16 bit analog outputs can also be used for controlling or stimulating external devices Using channel data derived from input channels and equations or canned waveforms the analog outputs can be updated at rates as high as 100 kHz A selected acquisition can be armed e oncommand from the keypad or PC e at power on or After an acquisition LogBook may continue the same or begin a new acquisition The new acquisition can begin immediately after a specified time interval or at a specified time Data Storage and Retrieval The quantity of acquired
146. ection entitled LBK COM 422 485 explains how to set the communications option for RS 232 2 Connect the modem to the LogBook s 9 pin Serial COM port RS 232 mode is required a7 5 Description Not Used connects to TxD connects to RxD Not Used Common connects to Common DB9 Connector Not Used male connects to CTS connects to RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not Used Modem Connection to LogBook s Serial COM Port 3 Turn power on to the LogBook and the modem The LogBook will automatically send the specified command string 1f applicable Note that some modems have an LED to indicate that the device is in auto answer mode and or that the modem is being initialized Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Step X 4 Configure the PC s Communication Parameters 1 Launch the Control Panel applet by navigating as follows from the Windows Desktop Start gt Settings Control Panel gt LogBook Configuration From the Add New Hardware dialog box select Add Device Select Modem from the Connection Type list From the Device Connection list select the modem that your PC will be using oS Sf In the Phone Number text field enter the dial up number of the modem that is connected to the LogBook gy Logbook Configuration LogBook Properties Test Hardware Device Settings Device Name Loge ook3 Connection Type Mode
147. ed concurrently with a user defined serial channel that captures the heading data from 6 4 the same GPS To capture user defined parameters from the GPS intimate knowledge of the GPS data strings 1s required GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual Configuration Setup Overview Launch Log View Setup Serial Communications Parameters pg 6 6 Turn Channel On pg 6 6 Using Select from Pre Defined Longitude GPS Specific Latitude Inputs Altitude UTC Quality pg 6 7 Select Data Type 6 7 e Integer e Float e Character Create Format String pg 6 8 Enter User Label or leave default pg 6 6 Repeat for each desired serial channel Enter Units or leave default pg 6 6 Select Sample Rates A B C or D see the LogView section Configure other acquisition parameters e g trigger parameter trigger and stop events see the LogView section Download the acquisition setup to an attached LogBook see the Communication and Download sections of the Log View section Enable the Readings column in the Recommended for GPS Serial configuration grid to First Time setup validate your format strings page 6 6 LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 5 Setting up Serial Communication Parameters To setup the serial communication parameters of either or both RS 232 ports open the Hardware LogView C PROGRA
148. ed in Calc Chans to display calculated channels and their current values the format page 1 of 3 GPS Chans to display Global Positioning System Channels This menu map is continued on the following page LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 7 LBK1 Menu Map continued ESA Name Type Description Fields and Parameters System Info a Set Time Term Terminal Configuration Conf Allows the user to set parameters for the LBK1 terminal These values are saved in the LBK1 s non volatile memory LBK1 Specifications Operating Temperature 20 C to 50 C Connector RJ 11 Display LCD 16 lines x 40 characters Power None required Includes the following System Information Terminal Firmware Rev LogBook FPGA Rev LogBook OS Rev LogBook Serial Number LogBook Model Number DAC Option Card Installed Yes or No Memory Option Size in MB PC Card Size Time reports time registered by LogBook s internal timer Month sets LogBook timer to current month Year sets LogBook timer to current year Hour sets LogBook timer to current hour Minute sets LogBook timer to current minute Second sets LogBook timer to current second Contrast sets display contrast from 1 to 25 Brightness sets display brightness from 1 to 25 Key Sound can be yes or no to confirm keystroke Back Light can be yes or no not using the back light can conserve battery life Verify Power Off ca
149. el 1 i P1_CHOO 10 0 to 10 0 Volt Local ea AT CHO P1_CHO1 o 10 0 to 10 0 volt Local P1CHOo2 8 PI_CHO2 On 10 0 to 10 0 Volt Local Analog Input Channel Configuration Storage Tab Selected Storage DEK Parameters User Scaling Point Cal DBE Parameters Physical Channel g Channel asap Lasel LU Fezie Henge lls Type Param 1 Param 2 Param 3 Param 4 P1 CHOO 0 0 On 3 1590 3 159 Wol DEK 4 P1 CHOO 0 1 P1_CHOO0 01 On 3159t0 3 159 Vol DEK4 oi Uuni Me WA IANA talk lam Analog Input Channel Configuration DBK Parameters Tab Selected The above figure shows the DBK Parameters tab used to configure channels with programmable DBK parameters Depending on the DBK values must be entered in the Param 1 to Param 4 columns One such example is the DBK4 that requires filter settings some other DBK cards also have programmable parameters Some DBKs have hardware switches and jumpers for configuration When using such DBKs corresponding parameters must be set in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window Storage DBE Parameters User Scaling Pomt Cal UiserScaling Physical Channel DE cia oo eso pare Un UES F P1_CHOO P1_CHO0 On 0 1 to 500 1 Local pr Ibe eye CHO P1_CHO1 On 0 0 to 2000 0 es Local 1000 De z Pa P1_CHO2 P1_CHO2 On 10 0 to 10 0 vat focai Eo ns eens Analog Input Channel Configuration User Scaling Tab Selected The User Scaling tab shown above has Scale and Offset columns In User Scaling you c
150. els support power grids of USA Europe Japan and Asia Power Requirements Table Power Required Wats DaqBook 100 510mA 12 VDC 6 12 W DaqBook 112 360 mA 12 VDC 4 32 W DaqBook 120 510mA 12 VDC 6 12 W DaqBook 200 620mA 12 VDC 7 44 W DaqBook 216 600 mA 12 VDC 7 2 W DaqBook 260 620 mA 12 VDC 7 44 W DaqBoard 100A 1330 mA 5 VDC 6 65 W DaqBoard 112A 970 mA O 5 VDC 4 85 W DaqBoard 200A 1700mA O 5 VDC 85 W DaqBoard 216A 1340 mA O 5 VDC 6 7 W DaqBoard 2000 Series board 700mA O 5S VDC 3 5 W Note 1 cPCI DaqBoard 2000c Series board 700 mA 5 VDC 3 5 W Note 1 DaqBook 2000A Under No External Load OW DaqBook 2000X 467mA O ISVDC 7W Under Full External Load 15W 1533mA 15VDC 23 W DaqBook 2000E Under No External Load OW 1133mA I5SVDC 17W Under Full External Load 15W 2200mA O I5SVDC 33 W Daq PC Card 112B Normal Operation Daq PC Card 216B 160 mA 5 VDC 0 8W Power Down Mode 40 mA 5 VDC 0 2 W Note 1 For DaqBoard 2000 Series and 2000c Series boards consumption can be up to 10 W with external accessories Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 17 Calculating Your System s Power Needs Use the chart below and the worktable on the next page to ensure your system will have sufficient power If the load calculated in the worktable exceeds available power from the chart at the right you must add a power card or a module such as a DBK32A or DBK33 Available Power Chart S
151. em connected devices prior to connecting or disconnecting cables or setting hardware configurations Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death and equipment damage even under low voltage conditions CAUTION Perform the following procedure using ESD tools containers and procedures One or more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge 1 Turn off system power 2 Remove the LogBook s top cover and locate CN4 a 30 pin SIMM socket see following figure 3 To gain access to CNA first remove the RAM memory board from CNS 4 Using ESD precautions remove the bypass board from CN4 5 Using ESD precautions insert the LBK2 analog output board into CN4 Note that the board and socket are keyed to mate one way only and will lock together when properly mated 6 Using ESD precautions replace the RAM memory board into CNS 7 Replace the top cover and screws 8 Turn on system power Notes CN4 LBK2 Analog Output Board CN4 and CNS slots each have two release clips that must be depressed in order to release cards Expansion Micro Bus processor The LBK2 Analog Output Board inserts into the CN4 slot on LogBook s Motherboard PE Card 8A 250 W Fast acting CN10 EN11 Littelfuse 312008 SW Fuse CNB RS 232 422 485 Slot LED LogBook Motherboard CN4 Location Reference LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 9 LBK2 Specificatio
152. ems and the Upload Scheduler 7 11 The configuration download cannot be accomplished via a serial port connection This is because once the modem configuration is downloaded to the PC Card in the LogBook the LogBook will no longer be capable of serial port communication directly with the PC Reference Note If needed refer to additional PC card information in chapter 1 and in the Log View section of this user s manual 8 Close LogView Step Y 2 Set up the Modem For many short haul modems it is necessary to configure one modem as the local modem attached to the PC and one modem as the remote modem attached to the LogBook In some cases the setup is performed by setting hardware switches on the devices and it others it is performed via software commands Tip Some modems require the user to setup the serial parameters e g baud rate stop bits and L parity Make sure these match the setup of the communications parameters that are selected in the LogBook Configuration control panel applet For information on how to perform these setup operations refer to the instructions supplied with your modems Step Y 3 Physically Connect the LogBook to the Modem 1 If your LogBook has the LBK COM 422 485 option installed verify that the option is set for RS 232 communication The option is discussed in chapter 5 See following note If you are using the LBK COM 422 485 communications option you will need to ensure that
153. ence 989592 LogView LV 25 The buttons at the bottom of the window see following figure allow you to e Upload All the files on the PC Card to your PC s hard drive with the designated Path and delete data on the PC Card if Delete on Upload All is selected in Log View Preferences Note with attached mode and an active acquisition this is the only way to upload data Upload Selected uploads only those files which you select Delete All the files on the PC Card Refresh will refresh Explorer with data from an active acquisition Cancel will close the dialog box Select File s to Upload Fath Logbook Scan Fate A Total Scans Size Byte FITE 2 3 98 11 3249 543AM 2 E800 149600 El Filename JSTE Upload All Upload Selected Delete All Refresh Cancel If uploading an active file for the first time using Upload All the following window appears here Cancel will stop an upload in progress Exploring LogBookC STE Acquisition_1 Path LogBookCA STES Acquisition Scan Rate A E Posttrigger Scans Size Byte a TrogerBlock_1 22398 1 29 49 266 PM 0 110 3080 Upload Binary Data Beginning Destination file DABS Lov iMa datas TE _141 BIN Filename If uploading an active file that is already partially uploaded the following window will appear Upload Binary Data Continuation Destination file D285 Vi datas TE_141 B1N HAZ Cancel LV 26 LogVie
154. ent 1 The example below shows data files from an acquisition with 2 trigger blocks and 2 timebases the acquisition was uploaded in segments All the dates and times are the same because these trigger blocks are all part of the same acquisition The first two files represent a continuous data collection 2 files exist because of partial uploads 1st Acquisition DO3 15 98 T12 04 12 R1 B14 o D03 15 98 T12 04 12 R1 B1 2 Uploaded in 2 pieces DOs 15 96 mio 0 Ri BON DO03 15 98 T12 04 12 R1 B2 2 Uploaded in 3 pieces A These acquired together but at DOS 15 Sis 112204 12 N different rates US I 2 SO DO3 15 98 T12 04 12 R2 B2 1 DI eee ee E D03 15 98 T12 04 12 R2 B2 3 Example of Data Uploaded in Segments Procedures Software Reference Because of Log View s flexibility this manual can not detail every possible use of the system Instead these procedures explain how to perform typical tasks Understanding these tasks will help you apply the principles to a variety of data acquisition environments For your particular application you may need to combine or alter these procedures For more details you may need to refer to related Menu Descriptions or procedures This section begins with a flowchart of a simple acquisition and then explains the following tasks and operational modes Using an Attached LogBook page LV 12 Using LogBook Unattached page LV 14 Simple Data Logging page LV 14 Setting
155. ept when a channel explicitly requires a different protocol such as FTP over TCP IP The use of such standards makes LogBook easier to use and extend To implement these standards LogBook includes a command parser and conversion software to convert measured voltages into physical measurements such as temperature force or acceleration This software is used for monitoring transducer measurements both at the PC and the LBK1 LogBook can return all data as physical quantities and or raw voltage measurements Large blocks of raw or converted data such as entire acquisitions or a set of consecutive scans are transferred as binary files using file transfer protocols Smaller blocks such as individual readings or scans are transferred in readable ASCII Parallel Port ECP Mode LogBook includes an ECP parallel port for high speed local communication with a PC in the ECP mode the only supported protocol is ECP Your PC mode may need to be changed in its BIOS or in the Window Settings consult your PC s documentation or the PC s manufacturer as needed Serial Port LogBook includes an RS 232 RS 422 485 optional call factory for availability serial port supporting both point to point and multi drop remote communication Other Communication Channels The serial communication protocols are standard so non PC hosts can communicate with LogBook The use of printable ASCII for commands and status and the use of standard file transfer p
156. er provides the information needed to add any one of the following three remote options e Remote On Off Switch and LED e Remote On Off Switch no LED e Remote LED Indicator no remote switch Considerations DBK Configuration The DBKs are usually configured before the connections are made and power is applied This order of installation can prevent equipment damage and help ensure proper operation on startup Many DBKs have on board jumpers and or DIP switches used for setting channels and other variables These settings are discussed in the individual DBK sections of the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 which is installed on the PC s hard drive as a part of product support The default location is the Programs directory accessible via the Windows Desktop For systems with many modules stacking units together helps conserve space and assure easy cable runs Such stacking is typically accomplished with the use of a splice kit The kit is shipped as part of the package for several DBK modules The splice plate kits include metal plates fastener panels that screw onto the sides of a module A vertical rack of several modules can be assembled An optional handle is available for portable use for example when using two stacked modules Prior to expanding your LogBook system you should review the following DBK Basics section of the manual with special attention to the section entitled Tips on Setting up a D
157. era ama AT E arma ama fs E f arma am s persz oma ata Jo Poma isma Hama Ys pers isma C am fs Deess 20ma oma fos so o O E en Total Power Requirement in mW Note 1 DBK44 s 60 mA value is based on 30 mA for each of two 5B modules This value will be higher if using 5B module 5B38 200 mA for each 5B38 or if using 5B39 170 mA for each 5B39 Refer to the DBK44 document module for more information Note 2 DBK2 and DBKO5 are not used with LogBook ee Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply powered separately This table is continued DBK Power Requirement Worktable Demand DBK Voltage Reference Calculation Options 15 VDC 15 VDC 5 VDC Sub Total DBK65 25 mA DBK70 lt l mA lt l mA lt l mA DBK80 25 mA lt 1 mA DBK81 35 mA lt 2 mA DBK82 60 mA lt 2 mA DBK83 60 mA lt 2 mA DBK84 60 mA lt 2 mA DBK200 DBK201 DBK202 DBK203 DBK204 DBK205 DBK206 DBK207 DBK207 CJC DBK208 DBK209 DBK210 DBK213 DBK214 DBK215 did lt l mA lt l mA 6 mA 7 90 mA 10 mA 10 mA A Note 2 DBK207 DBK207 CJC DBK208 and DBK210 are not used with LogBook ld Three asterisks indicate that the DBK is a module with internal power supply powered separately Additional Reading During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the
158. eral times between recorded samples If the sample rate of the associated serial channel is fast relative to the transmission speed of the serial device the temporary storage may be sampled and stored many times without any new updates from the serial device When the system is first armed the serial channel data may be invalid for an undetermined number of scans Until the serial device provides that which is required by the serial channel definition the associated serial channel will be invalid For high sample rates many scans may be executed before valid data is present on the serial channels 6 2 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual Installation and Setup Installing a New System For new LogBook systems perform the following steps to install 2 Authorization Step 1 Follow the general instructions included with your LogBook for installing your hardware and software Modem Support Disable Step 2 Launch LogView Upload Scheduler Disable GPS Support Disable Step 3 Select File Authorization Step 4 Enter ED7B55484273 then click Apply Code Step 5 Connect your serial device s Step 6 Close and re launch LogView Pare Stat Uy Trial Upgrading an Older System When adding the GPS Serial Input option as an upgrade to an older LogBook system perform the following steps Step 1 Use the Add Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel to uninstall your current version of Lo
159. erential 16 single ended inputs expandable to 256 input channels via DBK cards 7 gain input ranges unipolar and bipolar 40 digital I O lines expandable to 208 4 pulse counting inputs Gain and unipolar bipolar settings are programmed in real time 10 us max Scan sequence memory 1024 analog channels plus 128 digital channels for any combination of channels gains Input power 10 to 45 VDC AC adapter included e LBK options e DBK options LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 3 LogBook 300 Block Diagram Gain select per channel Control Signal I O Sequencer reset P1 ANALOG I O Computer Control I O 0 PARALLEL PORT ECP mode P2 gt DIGITAL I O Y SERIAL oe PORT 1 RS 232 or m optionally 7 RS 422 485 TERMAL o P3 PULSE FREQUENCY HIGH SPEED DIGITAL I O 10 to 45 VDC input via DINS Power Supply 1 4 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual LogBook 360 Block Diagram Card Drawer DBK Card Terminal Panel Connections Connection Connections 1 panel per DBK Card P1 x o Se e 020 DBK Cards Oo 909 209 User supplied 9A 99 coo all 3 must be analog To O E 90 Soo or all 3 digital il Sensors lt 5 eee no mixing l x 1 Eine 0 Connect to DB37on r ma So Card Drawer SNUR connector options available 1 i EAL 9 9 9 0 0000000000000000 See Hardware Setup Figure Intercon
160. erial Connection Type Serial Port Device Connection COM Protocol RS232 Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab as follows Bits per second 38400 Flow control Hardware Click the lt APPLY gt button Click the lt OK gt button A 2 Supplement HopNet Modems 887997 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A Configure the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for Device LogBook Serial Fixed 1 From the LogBook Configuration Applet click lt Add Device gt 2 Set the Properties via the LogBook Properties Tab as follows Device Name LogBook Serial Fixed Connection Type Serial Port Fixed Baud Device Connection COM1 Protocol RS232 3 Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab as follows Bits per second 19200 Flow control Hardware 4 Click the lt APPLY gt button 5 Click the lt OK gt button Configure the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for Device LogBook HopNet 1 From the LogBook Configuration Applet click lt Add Device gt 2 Set the Properties via the LogBook Properties Tab as follows Device Name LogBook HopNet Connection Type Serial Port Fixed Baud Device Connection COM1 Protocol RS232 3 Set the Properties via the Port Settings Tab as follows Bits per second 115200 see Note 1 Flow control Hardware 4 Click the lt APPLY gt button 5 Click the lt OK gt button Note 1 The bits per second in step 3 above for device LogBook HopNet does not need to ma
161. erial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual The following table describes the available settings for Channel Type GPS specific Latitude Degrees Latitude Degrees is an integer that varies from 90 degrees A positive on S1 only number represents the northern hemisphere while a negative number represents the southern hemisphere Latitude Minutes Latitude Minutes varies from O to 60 minutes with 4 digits of decimal precision providing a distance resolution of 0 02 meters Longitude Degrees Longitude Degrees is an integer that varies from 180 degrees A positive number represents the western hemisphere while a negative number represents the eastern hemisphere Longitude Minutes Longitude Minutes varies from 0 to 60 minutes with a variable number of digits of decimal precision providing a distance resolution of 0 02 meters Altitude varies from 11 000 to 21 767 meters with 0 5 meter resolution UTC Time UTC Time varies from 0 to 86 399 seconds Quality of Fix The Quality of Fix provided by the receiver varies from O to 8 providing feedback as to the dependability of the fix information O indicates an invalid fix arp Each serial channel represents one and only one number or character To acquire both Longitude and Latitude for example two channels must be enabled and set respectively When collecting data from a non GPS device each desired parameter in the data sent by the serial device must occupy a uniqu
162. ery LogBook input and output is called a channel When an input channel is enabled the LogBook will sample and save it at the specified frequency To collect and save numeric data from serial devices a serial channel must be defined Each serial channel defines a single number embedded in the ASCII serial input string sourced by the serial device Each serial channel has an associated format string that provides the parsing and converting instructions to the LogBook Up to 16 serial channels can be defined within the Log View software application Terms Serial channel Serial input string Format string A serial channel is a LogBook data element like an analog input channel that can be collected and stored with the other analog and digital input data A serial channel defines a single numeric field within the serial data stream sourced by the serial device A serial input string is the ASCII data being transmitted by the serial device Typically the serial input string contains several numeric and character fields and is terminated by carriage return CR and or line feed LF characters A format string is a user created character string that contains the instructions necessary for the LogBook to parse out the desired field in the serial input string Capabilities and Limitations Interface type Data types Serial input string size Number types Serial channel usage Serial baud rate GPS port Synchronicity Data valid
163. es not respond for 30 seconds please reboot and change the settings in the configuration utility Data bits Test Results Parity DEWICE ONLINE Performance Test Stop bits fi Flow control Download Speed gt 34060 bytes sec Upload Speed gt 42314 bytes sec Cancel Apply Cancel Apply LogBook Properties Tab Test Hardware Tab Testing the Hardware Before testing LogBook 300 a Verify the device has been properly installed b Make sure the communication cable serial or parallel is firmly in place to the proper ports c Verify the device is powered on nfel Testing the LogBook 300 device might cause the system to hang If test results are not JH displayed within 30 seconds or if the system does not respond properly do the following e Reboot the system e Upon power up re enter the LogBook Configuration e Ensure the configuration settings are correct Change the settings as applicable To begin the test click the Test button Test results should be displayed within a few seconds Test results indicate if the device is online properly connected powered on and ready to transfer the data or offline If the device is online Performance Test will display Download and Upload speed rates These rates represent the maximum speed at which downloading and uploading files can be performed Actual transfer time will depend on channel configuration and the size of the transfer LogBook 300 Quick Start
164. essing ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD is the transfer of an electrostatic charge between bodies having different electrostatic potentials This transfer occurs during direct contact of the bodies or when induced by an electrostatic field ESD energy can damage an integrated circuit IC Excitation Some transducers e g strain gages thermistors and resistance temperature detectors RTDs require a known voltage or current input in order for the sensor to operate This known input is called the Excitation Gain The degree to which a signal is amplified or attenuated to allow greater accuracy and resolution can be expressed as xn or dB Isolation The arrangement or operation of a circuit so that signals from another circuit or device do not affect the isolated circuit Isolation usually refers to a separation of the direct link between the signal source and the analog to digital converter ADC Isolation is necessary when measuring high common mode voltage Linearization Some transducers produce a voltage in linear proportion to the condition measured Other transducers e g thermocouples have a nonlinear response To convert nonlinear signals into accurate readings requires software to calibrate several points in the range used and then interpolate values between these points Multiplexer MUX A device that selects a signal from among several signals and outputs it on a single channel Sample reading The value of a sig
165. est R4 B1 1 BI 11KB Bi E 00 99 1 34 00 PM al est l mary Lata a Test Rl Be 1 BIN 1KB Bi O 16 99 1 34 10 PM al est le mary Data aa Test Re Ge 1 61N IKB Bi E 00 99 1 34 12 PM al est JE mare Lata GEI la Test R3 B2 1 BIN 1KB Bi E 16399 1 34 16 P m 4 E Source File s Formats Target Directory CALogviewtdatas over Data files are placed in format pecific subdirectories of the target directory Browse E sit Sample Screen from the Convert Binary Data Utility Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 51 Merging Binary Data no toolbar icon qa 2elect File s To Merge Concatenate File Folder File Folder a Test R B1 1 BI d Files Binary Data 716 99 1 37 00 PM fa Test R Bz 1 BIM d Files Binary Data 7 16 99 1 37 00 PM fa Test E 63 1 BIN d Files Binary Data 7 16 99 1 37 00 PM Filename Iv Merge subrates ENEE Concatenate segments ena Preparing to Merge Subrates A screen similar to that shown in the above figure appears when the Merge Binary Data is selected from the Tools pull down menu On this window when the Merge Subrates box is checked the Convert Binary Data utility groups the related Rate files together and displays a single item In the example below this single item 1s TEST R B1 1 BIN The number of files that this item describes is now shown in size column of the list box 4 files Selecting TEST R B1 1 BIN and then clicking the lt Execute gt but
166. estart it to initialize the configuration b Verify that the proper 9 pin cable is connected to the LogBook from the HopNet Modem c Verify that the proper 9 pin cable is connected to the PC from the HopNet Modem d Verify that the HopNet Modem is connected to the intended hardware e g LogBook PC remote receiver e Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of the configuration downloaded to the LogBook f Verify that the Serial Ports on both the LogBook and on the PC work LogBook User s Manual Appendix A 887997 Supplement HopNet Modems A 9 Notes A 10 Supplement HopNet Modems 887997 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A Error Codes Software Errors These errors can appear in the LogBook Monitor window of LogView O No Error Command Error Definitions 100 Command Error 101 Invalid Character 102 Syntax Error 103 Invalid Separator 104 Data Type Error 105 GET Not Allowed 108 Parameter Not Allowed 109 Missing Parameter 110 Command Header Error 111 Header Separator Error 112 Program Mnemonic Too Long 113 Undefined Header 114 Header Suffix Out Of Range 120 Numeric Data Error 121 Invalid Character In Number 122 Mantissa Too Large Not Defined In SCPI 123 Exponent Too Large 124 Too Many Digits 128 Numeric Data Not Allowed 130 Suffix Error 131 Invalid Suffix 134 Suffix Too Long 138 Suffix Not Allowed 140 Character Data Error 141 Invalid Character Data 144 Ch
167. et This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters selection Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend Note that during rapid meter fluctuations the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set points Displays limits by adding color red for high blue for low to the scale regions which equal and exceed the set limit values For Digital Meters the limits are indicated by red numbers and an upper red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit and blue numbers and a lower blue bar when reaching or exceeding the low limit Allows setting and showing limits as well as opening the Scale dialog box You can access a different dialog box from the one initially selected For example from the Set Scale dialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits Show Limits display as well as select Misc which allows you to Show Trend Indicator and Show Peak Hold Indicators Mouse buttons e Left Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu e Right Single clicking the right mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a configuration pop up menu Enable Input Reading Column no toolbar This command enables disables the Reading column of the Analog Input Channel Configuration icon spreadsheet to provide a numeric view of incoming data This function toggle
168. eters LV 54 Save Save AS LV 25 Analog Meters LV 54 Upload LV 25 Digital Meters LV 55 Download Download As LV 27 Meters Configuration LV 55 Configuration Report LV 27 Enable Inout Reading Column LV 57 About LogView LV 28 Start or Stop All Indicators LV 57 Authorization LV 28 Exit LV 28 Use code ED7B55484273 to authorize complete functionality see page LV 28 Understanding Log View Log View provides for easy setup and operation of LogBook LogView s flexibility can handle virtually any data acquisition environment The graphical Windows interface can display a variety of spreadsheets dialog boxes graphs charts and meters and accepts user input from a mouse and keyboard The easy to learn interface does not require programming or the configuration block diagrams It 1s important to understand the central role of the PC Card in LogBook Log View operation When LogBook operates in a stand alone mode not attached to the PC Log View must download the system and acquisition setup files to a PC Card The PC Card must then be manually transferred to LogBook Later LogBook s PC Card must be transferred back to the PC for uploading When LogBook and PC are attached in direct communication Log View can download to or upload from LogBook in real time via the communications link Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 1 Modes of LogView Operation
169. evel 0 8 V Output Float Leakage Current 10 yA Input Low Voltage 0 8 V max Input High Voltage 2 0 V min Input Low Current 10 pA Input High Current 10 yA Threshold Voltage Low 0 8 V typical 0 5 V min Threshold Voltage High 1 6 V typical 2 1 V max Hysteresis 400 mV min Pulse Width High or Low 520 ns min Input Impedance 27 KQ pull up to 5 V in parallel with 50 pF Input Low Current 10 0 yA max Input High Current 10 0 pA max Output High Voltage 2 4 V min 8 mA Output Low Voltage 0 5V max 8 mA LogBook User s Manual LogBook 300 Quick Start Before you get started Software Installation QS300 2 Verify that you have the following items Hardware Connection QS300 2 e LogBook 300 3 e TR 40U Power Supply Hardware Configuration QS300 4 e Serial Parallel Patch Cable or PC Card Reader LogBook 300 Device Configuration QS300 5 e PC with ECP Enhanced Capabilities Port e Data Acquisition CD Testing the Hardware QS300 7 e Monitor SVGA 1024 x 768 screen resolution Acquisition Configuration QS300 8 Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows AP users PC with Intel Pentium or equivalent 1 GHz A Note about Calibration QS300 8 512 MB memory 10 GB disk space e Windows Vista users PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready gt IMPORTANT Software must be installed first Software Installation 1 Close all running applications on the host PC 2 Remove pr
170. evious version drivers if present You can do this through Microsoft s Add Remove Programs feature 3 Insert the Data Acquisition CD 8 1 2 or higher into your CD ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto run An Opening Screen will appear If AutoRun is disabled a right click Windows Start menu b select Explore and c double click MasterSetup exe As an alternative to using the CD you can download software from www mecdaq com products software aspx 4 Click the lt ENTER SETUP gt button Note If you are downloading software from our website follow instructions provided there 5 From the hardware selection screen select your data acquisition device then follow the on screen instructions Note To enable all Log View features a From Log View s main window open the File pull down menu b select Authorization c enter ED7B55484273 in the dialog box and apply the code Hardware Connection WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to all system connected devices prior to connecting or disconnecting cables or setting hardware configurations Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death and equipment damage even under low voltage conditions When using LogBook 300 in attached mode the PC Card in LogBook 300 must already have the file logbook sys Otherwise LogView cannot communicate with LogBook 300 and LogBook 300 will appear dead AZ QS300 2 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Refere
171. f gates without overloading the preceding stage c An amplifier that accepts high source impedance input and results in low source impedance output effectively an impedance buffer d Buffer Amplifier see Buffer Amplifier Buffer Amplifier An amplifier used primarily to match two different impedance points and isolate one stage from a succeeding stage in order to prevent an undesirable interaction between the two stages Also see Buffer Channel A single input or output for the acquisition device In a broader sense an input channel is a signal path between the transducer at the point of measurement and the data acquisition system A channel can go through various stages buffers multiplexers or signal conditioning amplifiers and filters Input channels are periodically sampled for readings An output channel from a device can be digital or analog Outputs can vary in a programmed way in response to an input channel signal Common mode Common mode pertains to signals that are identical in amplitude and duration also can be used in reference to signal components Common mode voltage Common mode voltage refers to a voltage magnitude referenced to a common point that 1s shared by 2 or more signals Example referenced to common Signal 1 is 5 VDC and Signal 2 is 6 VDC The common mode voltage for the two signals is 5 5 VDC 5 6 2 Crosstalk An undesired transfer of signals between system components or chan
172. f you are close to the remote LogBook you should see the LogBook s local modem provide feedback indicating that it is being called Soon after the LogBook s local modem should pick up the call Once the communication link has been established the LogView screen will provide additional feedback Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual LogBook and Telephone Modem States When LogBook is powered on software checks for a powered modem that is attached to the serial port If a modem is not detected the check is repeated once a minute until either a the modem is detected or b a serial communications connection is established Modem Detected Once the LogBook detects the presence of a modem it sends a series of AT commands to set the modem to an initial auto answer state The LogBook will check to see if the modem is in the auto answer mode approximately once per minute until the connection is established This method provides for modem recovery for example if the modem were to be powered off then on again LogBook software processes messages received from the modem until RING and then CONNECT messages are received This means the connection with the Host has been established The session is terminated when the Host hangs up and LogBook receives the message NO CARRIER At this point the initialization procedure is scheduled with a five second delay This delay gives the modem time to drop the connecti
173. facturer Tip To ensure ECP compatibility after proper setup use the Test Hardware utility described on page QS300 7 Before testing make sure LogBook 300 is properly connected powered on and that the Parallel Port Mode is set to ECP in BIOS Setup CAUTION Making errors in BIOS Setup can disrupt your system s operation If test hardware indicates a problem and you have inadequate experience with the BIOS Setup utility consult your System Administrator or other qualified individual QS300 6 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Serial Port If the selected device is connected to a serial port the properties window will include the fields shown in the following figure Baud rate can be set from 1200 to 115200 bits per second default 9600 When all fields have been changed to the desired settings you can click on one of the following options e Apply to store the device configuration Parameters are not locked in until you click the Apply button If you make changes and don t click Apply clicking the Test button in Test Hardware will yield unexpected errors e OK to store the configuration and exit the current property screen e Cancel to exit the current screen without storing any changes e Test Hardware to test the current device 34 LogBook Configuration LogBook Properties Test Hardware Prior to testing please make sure pour device is connected to the PL Bits per second 3600 l D IF your computer do
174. g download Cownld download Insert a formatted PC Card into the computer s For this method the LogBook must be connected to PC card slot the PC s serial or parallel port 2 Run LogView 1 Insert a formatted PC Card into LogBook s From LogView s Device pull down menu choose PC Card slot Select PC Card 2 Run LogView Select the applicable PC Card drive from the From LogView s Device pull down menu resulting pull down list choose Select LogBook Click LogView s lt DownLoad gt button _ Click on the desired LogBook Click the lt Attach gt button Click LogView s lt DownLoad gt button Note For method IT only if downloading a modem configuration LogBook s communication cable must connect to a parallel port on the PC Otherwise parallel or serial communications will do Q Reference Notes Additional information regarding PC Cards can be found in the chapter sections entitled Data Acquisition Overview page 1 8 and LogBook System File page 1 9 For information regarding LogView refer to the independent Log View section of this manual LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 7 System Software LogBook software includes LogView Upload Scheduler optional and a post acquisition data analysis application such as eZ PostView A synopsis of each application follows e LogView is a ready to use Windows based program for data acquisition and logging The program p
175. g can be realized e signal conditioning e analog output e digital I O e channel expansion e supplying powering to another acquisition device e providing an interface for different connectivity for example in a DaqBoard 2000 Series board converting a P4 100 pin connector to P1 P2 and P3 37 pin DB37 connectors 886995 DBK Basics pg 1 Reference Notes During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Refer to the PDF documentation especially the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 for details regarding both hardware and software in relevant to DBKs A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader is included on your CD The Acrobat Reader provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered from the factory How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device Each DBK connects to the primary data acquisition device e g a DaqBook DaqBoard or LogBook through one of three 37 pin ports which are designated as follows e Pl Analog VO e P2 Digital I O e P3 Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O Depending on the primary data acquisition device connectivity issues differ slightly This will be made clear by the figures and accompanying text tha
176. gView Step 2 Insert the upgrade CD If Autorun is enabled the setup program will launch automatically If it s disabled run SETUP EXE from the root directory of the CD Jumps Bh Grade oe LiveUpdate Step 3 In the opening window select LogBook support and click TETEN OK aa ili iii 5 and Internet Tools Microsoft Office 97 Professional Edition i Mjuice Media Support for Winamp Step 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation Note It may be necessary to restart your computer when the setup mE program 1s complete Step 5 After restarting your computer launch LogView 2 Authorization Step 6 Select File Authorization Step 7 Enter ED 7B55484273 then click Apply Code Modem Support nee Step 8 Connect your serial device s GPS Support Disable Step 9 Close and re launch Log View gran Day al LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 3 Configuring an Acquisition What you need to know about your non GPS device To successfully capture data sourced by a non GPS device you ll need intimate operational knowledge about the device Use the Operator s Manual shipped with the device to collect information about the following Baud rate parity stop bits and data bits Data transmission rate Data string To successfully communicate with the serial device the LogBook s serial port s must be set up to match the RS 232 parameters of the serial de
177. gView s Acquisition Configuration window Defines basic trigger parameters using the following submenus Scan Rate Clock Source can be internal or external Base Rate A Hz can be off or set by LogView Base Rate B Hz can be off or set by LogView Base Rate C Hz can be off or set by LogView Base Rate D Hz can be off or set by LogView Acquisition Name name of the configuration file 1vc that is currently loaded Acquisition Setup Number of Re arms infinite or number of repetitions until acquisition is stopped ae Conf Scans the number of scans before the trigger event that will be saved a ne NS Tig Conf Source can be immediately manually analog channel digital channel Trigger Configuration Date to set Absolute Time Time to set Absolute Time Retrigger under absolute Time set duration to next trigger Channel user label for analog and digital channels Condition can be rising or falling edge for analog or digital channel source Threshold a voltage value for analog channel source Hysteresis a voltage value for analog channel source PostT Conf Stop On can be manually analog channel digital channel Post Trigger Configuration Channel user label for analog and digital channels Scans the number of scans before the trigger event that will be saved Condition can be rising or falling edge for analog or digital channel source Threshold a voltage value for analog channel source Hysteresis a voltag
178. ge conditions CAUTION Perform the following procedure using ESD tools containers and procedures One or more related components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Turn off system power Remove the LogBook s top cover and locate CNS see figure for location Remove the RS 232 485 board from CNS Note that CNS has two release clips Rotate the RS 232 485 board to a relatively upside down position and insert back into CN8 Note that onboard text indicates which end should be up for a given communication option 1 e RS 232 UP 7 or RS 485 UP T 5 For RS 485 applications ensure the address setting on rotary switch SW2 is unassigned and change the address if needed See note 6 Replace the top cover and screws 7 Turn on system power oe Notes CN4 LBK2 Analog Output Board opt 1 The CNS slot has two release CNS RAM Memory Board 4 or 16 MB clips that must be depressed to release the COM card Expansion 2 The COM Card has onboard oa T text indicating orientation as follows RS 232 T UP T RS 485 T UP T PC Card The LBK COM 422 485 Card Pasta OREA inserts into the CNS slot on Littelfuse 431 9 CN8 RS 232 422 485 Slot MM LogBook s Motherboard LogBook Motherboard CNS Location Reference For RS 485 applications rotary switch SW2 sets the address SW2 is located next to CNS just inside the PC Card door Use a small flat head screwdriver to set a particular address
179. ge will be displayed otherwise you must count the LED flashes to determine the error Note that flash codes 08 09 and 17 are associated with multiple errors and thus require an LBK1 to determine which error applies ERROR LED Flash Code Control Terminal Message 1 NS486 Chip Revision Changed Error 2 Watchdog Timeout Error 3 Flash Startup Code Checksum Error 4 Flash FPGA Code Checksum Error 5 DRAM initialization not complete Error 6 DRAM Sizing Error 7 1 MB DRAM SIMM Insufficient Memory 8 DRAM Address Line Error 8 DRAM Data Line Error 8 DRAM Integrity Test Error 9 SRAM Address Line Error 9 SRAM Data Line Error 9 SRAM Integrity Test Error 10 SRAM Low Battery Error 11 FPGA Load Error 12 Real Time Clock Low Battery Error 13 DRAM Parity Error 14 Analog Output Slot Empty 15 Calibration Table Verification Error 16 ADC Self Calibration Error 17 TRAP Divide by Zero or Divide Overflow 17 TRAP Debug Trap Hardware Breakpoint 17 TRAP Non Maskable Interrupt NMI 17 TRAP Software Breakpoint 17 TRAP INTO Instruct Overflow Detected 17 TRAP BOUND instruction Range Exceeded 17 TRAP Invalid Opcode 17 TRAP Coprocessor Not Available 17 TRAP Double Fault 17 TRAP Coprocessor Segment Overrun 17 TRAP Invalid Task State Segment 17 TRAP Segment Not Present 17 TRAP Stack Exception 17 TRAP General Protection Fault 18 Printf Floating Point Error 19 FPGA PC Card File Checksum Error 20 FPGA PC Card File Load Error DRAM Dynamic Random
180. hannels is greater than 50 0 Scan Rate Setup Acquisition Configuration F Infinite Rearms Number of Re armns o Enable Event Mark Enable Time Stamp T Trigger Block Definition Scan Rate e Internal Clack Max Frequency 100 0 kHz f External Clack Appi rae reduction averaging Duration fi Min Base Rate A Scan Rate Setup Accomplished on the right half of the Acquisition Configuration Window Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 43 The Scan Rate block is the right half of the Acquisition Configuration window see previous figure To set the scan rate you can use LogBook s internal clock or an external clock Brief descriptions follow Note The scan to scan time is not recorded when tracking variable speed events e Internal Clock The scan to scan timing may be set by a fixed frequency pacer clock LogBook s time of day clock has 1 16 second resolution for data logging applications where acquisitions must be performed at specific times during the day The time of occurrence for each acquisition and its trigger are recorded with the data The internal clock can be reset in the LogBook Monitor window in the Device menu e External Clock Each scan may be individually started by an external TTL level trigger to allow the scan rate to track an external variable speed event such as engine revolutions The external clock signal is applied to LogBook through pin 20 of the P1 DB37 Analog I O co
181. hat you must set manually to match your application e Some DaqBook 100 Series and DaqBook 200 Series models are partially configured in software e DaqBook 2000 Series devices have no jumpers or internal switches and are configured entirely through software e Dag PC Cards are configured entirely in software e DaqBoard 2000 Series boards are PCI type boards They have no jumpers or switches and are configured entirely through software e cPCI DaqBoard 2000c Series boards are compact PCI cPCI type boards They have no jumpers or switches and are configured entirely through software e You may need to refer to other documentation such as Quick Starts Installation Guides User s Manuals and pertinent DBK document modules Perform all hardware configurations before connecting signal and power Remember to configure all the DBK cards and modules for your application Several jumpers and DIP switches may need to be set channel gain filters signal mode etc Setting up channel parameters often requires both hardware and software setup Route and connect all signal and power cables while all power is turned OFF To minimize electrical noise route all signal lines away from any RF or high voltage devices Follow your device s specific installation instructions For certain devices software should be installed first for others hardware should be installed prior to software installation After software is loaded remember to
182. he 5 VDC requirement exceeds 500 mW from a LogBook or Daq device then a DBK33 must be used Note that DBK33 can supply 1000 mW at 5 VDC Note The DBK34 has an 8 amp fuse and has a capacity of 5 A hr when in the 12V mode and a capacity of 2 5 A hr when in the 24V mode Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 19 DBK Power Requirement Worktable Demand DBK42 DBK43A DBK44 DBK45 DBK46 DBK48 DBKS50 DBKS1 DBK52 DBKS53 DBK54 DBKS55 DBK60 lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt I mA 60 mA Note 1 52 mA lt 1 mA 20 mA 400 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA lt 1 mA 6 mA lt 1 mA 15 mA lt 1 mA 15 mA lt 1 mA 30 mA 40 mA oo Nn Go Go n Uo Nn 200 455 455 95 ele DBK Options 15VDC 15VDC_ 5VDC Quantity x mW _ SubTotal wa f ol ol o To w fem ema sa ws sa osma oma sm ao o Dss f oma oma sa os s fama sma a o ao Dss Jima sma ama O s so fama toma aa soo wo o o FE EC E wma o ol o ToS wa sma i aa as Dss f isma sma OO ama ss sas f isma oma ama O ss Dss forma ama lt tma oo Dss fasma soma lt tma fas wo n 7ma lt tma 20 wa o o am gt wa o o am gt om o ea 0 or 0 0 am 0 ws ol o m o wo o o of o wa o o of o Dsk fama aims fs Pomar arma aims fs Dera E ama wore E E Soma aa Dera oma wm o D
183. he LogBook Terminal option LBK1 connects to LogBook s TERMINAL port the DBK Basics section of this If LBK1 is not used a remote ON OFF switch and LED indicator option can be manual connected to LogBook via the TERMINAL port LBK options are detailed in the LBK chapter of the user s manual After verifying that all equipment power is off hardware connection typically proceeds as follows Refer to the previous figure as needed 1 Connect LogBook 300 to PC There are four ways for LogBook 300 to communicate with the host PC These are parallel port serial port to serial port serial port to USB and manual transportation of the PC Card Note that the parallel port method is represented in the previous figure a Parallel port to parallel port If using the parallel port connect a DB25male to DB25female parallel cable e g CA 35 2 or CA 35 6 2ft or 6ft respectively to PARALLEL PORT on LogBook 300 and to the corresponding parallel port on the host PC When this method is used the PC must be set to the ECP mode See ECP Parallel Port page QS300 6 for additional information b Serial port to serial port If using the serial port use a null modem serial cable CA 47 to connect the DB9 SERIAL PORT on LogBook 300 to the corresponding DB9 serial port on the host PC c Serial port to USB port Requires an adapter kit To connect the LogBook to a USB port you will need a RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p n CA 232 USB KIT av
184. he modem to eee operate properly Connection Modem T Configuration Settings Panel Showing Modem Initialization String Text Box gt LogBook sends Hayes compatible auto baud and auto answer commands by default If you choose to enter your own command settings omit the AT which is standard in Hayes command strings gt Certain modems will not answer incoming calls unless they receive a command to do so Refer to your modem s user s manual for instructions gt Every time the LogBook is powered up it will issue your specified command string to the local modem Note 2 If Connection at Fixed Baud is selected you will need to choose the desired baud rate from a pull down list as indicated on page 7 11 The fixed baud rate connection is typically used for short haul modems but can be used for telephone modems Never select a baud rate that is higher than that specified in your modem s documentation Close the LogBook Hardware Configuration window Setup the other acquisition parameters as desired After the configuration is complete download it to a PC Card The download can be done in either of two ways a with the PC Card in the PC s socket or b with the PC Card in a LogBook through a parallel port connection 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 3 The configuration download cannot be accomplished via a serial port connection This is because once the modem configuration i
185. hout using special programming skills e Provide flexible triggering to acquire continuous data capture exceptions or to trigger based on calculated channels e Configure and operate expansion chassis including the DBK option cards and modules designed for various signal conditioning environments e Provide utilities convert units calibrate sensors calculate channels control outputs alarms etc In handling data Log View can e Download an acquisition setup file to a PC Card for physical transport to a remote LogBook or send the setup file directly to the PC Card in a LogBook via the serial or parallel port e Upload the recorded data from LogBook by corresponding means e Create files for use by other Windows programs e g database or analysis Utility wise Log View can e Calibrate all gains and offsets on a per channel basis e Launch a separate view program that allows you to graphically view pre recorded data e Interact with LogBook while the acquisition is taking place including manual trigger and event marking In monitoring an acquisition Log View can e Display readings and status in real time On screen indicators provide channel feedback during an acquisition Channel values can be displayed in charts bar graphs analog meters or digital readouts e Show system status including trigger status errors alarms etc LV 4 LogView 989592 Software Reference Software User Interface Log View s user inte
186. i An optional sign followed by an octal decimal integer or hexadecimal constant is matched An octal constant consists of 0 and zero or more octal digits A decimal constant consists of a non zero decimal digit and zero or more decimal digits A hexadecimal constant consists of the characters Ox or OX followed by one or more upper or lowercase hexadecimal digits Leading white space characters are skipped 0 An octal integer consisting of an optional sign followed by one or more zero or non zero octal digits is matched Leading white space characters are skipped S A sequence of non white space characters is matched Leading white space characters are skipped u An unsigned decimal integer consisting of one or more decimal digits is matched Leading white space characters are skipped X A hexadecimal integer consisting of an optional sign followed by an optional prefix 0x or 0X followed by one or more upper or lowercase hexadecimal digits is matched Leading white space characters are skipped A conversion type specifier of is treated as a single ordinary character that matches a single character in the input data LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 9 Channel Type Selection Table The following table shows the required channel type selection for each valid conversion type specifier This table does not apply to format directives using the reject indicator The
187. ia oa o o a me DD 10 DBK201 878394 Dimensional Drawings 9oUUIOOUUIOOUUIODUO gg 000990 000 99000 990090 OoDOOOODODOODODOODODOY pOODodaooouoodcooODoodcOoOo Oo D 13 6 10 mM eornwWrertrw TB6 TBS TBLO TB12 o o a paz TEER 15 Very Wor TER 15 4 4 ae i BBKZ Ve 15 10 69 DBK202 Note DBK203 and DBK204 are modules that house a DBK202 board Refer to the 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 category for applicable dimensions DD 11 878394 Dimensional Drawings P N O AGNO AGNO ABNO ABNO DOND CLK XTTL DACS DACZ DAC1 DACO TA A A RO 8 QVO OOOOOOO bd Booodooaqaoaooanoan cneoO non Boo oOo 2 OD pDOoODoDooooono on oOo BO non oOo Oo oO a oO a O pDODoDOoODaDoOOoO DO a Bova oOo BO on oO oe oD O coo ODD oO odo ob oOo oOo BoB Ono Oo BoB oOo oO SnN NI JAYN S0ZA80 S0c2xA4d Ce SERIAL NUMBER XXXX XX DBK205 DD 12 878394 Dimensional Drawings 0 51 EZP 3 08 ne MP NFRFARARA NETTET EA TODA EPPS pe 3 50 3 08 1 52 AR 2p ee e588 nomnsonza 6d G rccranoa aaSiSgsl 0 21 SPACER FOR 6 SCREW 5 PLACES 9 91 0 51 16 54 DBK206 DBK206 DD 13 878394 Dimensional Drawings DD 14 MAA AdU 89 91 ES 6 S39Wld S M JIS 9 AOA JJOVAS LAN Cad OvV v sil qa PE CE Milo a 0 jjo 9 osua o am o o o S 0 a a o 95 i iar oy E oS y a oa a o a a a o a E 0 a 0 v o a oo y 190 y ollo o
188. icable these products have a Declaration of Conformity stating which specifications and operating conditions apply You can view the Declarations of Conformity at www mecdag com legal aspx CE Information page Cautions Notes and Tips Refer all service to qualified personnel This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage under noted conditions Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment damage This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti static mats and wrist straps ESD protective bags and cartons and related procedures This symbol indicates the message is important but is not of a Warning or Caution category These notes can be of great benefit to the user and should be read In this manual the book symbol always precedes the words Reference Note This type of note identifies the location of additional information that may prove helpful References may be made to other chapters or other documentation Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedur
189. ich drive letter is associated with the PC Card Note as PC Cards are inserted and removed from the sockets Windows will arbitrarily assign drive de La Ha letters If 2 PC Cards occupy 2 sockets the order of their insertion mee a Ml wank usually dictates the assignment of drive letters The lt Attach gt lt Upload gt and lt Download gt buttons on the Control Window should now be enabled In LogView s Analog Input Channel Configuration and Acquisition Configuration windows set up the channels and trigger parameters you wish to use see Simple Data Logging below Download the acquisition setup file Logbook sys will also be downloaded if not already present Eject remove the PC Card from the PC socket and transport it to the remote LogBook site Insert the PC Card into LogBook s socket and power up LogBook LogBook will automatically load the setup file and arm the system After the remote LogBook has collected all the data remove the PC Card from LogBook s socket transport it to the PC and insert it into the PC s socket If LogView is running it will soon recognize the presence of the card and enable the lt Upload gt and lt Download gt buttons Click Upload to pull the data into the PC After telling LogView which drive letters are associated with PC Card disks LogView will periodically poll the system for their presence As cards are inserted and ejected LogView will automatically enable and disable the lt Upload gt
190. ides 15 VDC and 5 VDC 967794 DBK Basics pg 13 Power Supplies and Power Connectors Power supplies convert the raw power they receive into a lower DC voltage and or current for use by devices with various power demands Many of the power supplies that are used to power data acquisition equipment are of the switching mode type These devices provide a regulated output whether the power supply s input is for example 60 Hz 120 VAC as in the United States or 50 Hz 220 VAC as found in European countries Small power supplies that do not switch consist of simple transformer rectifiers and filtered capacitors and operate over a smaller voltage range Some manufacturers improve the power output of their units over time without changing the model number For example one very popular power supply was previously rated at 15 VDC 2 7 amps yet more recent versions of the same model number are rated 15 VDC 3 3 amps Read the manufacturer s information pertaining to your power supplies so you don t accidentally overload the supply DBKs The following table indicates the type of power supply that is typically used with certain DBKs These DBKs can be powered from a Switching Mode Type Power Supply The switching mode power supply typically receives power from a 100 to 240 VAC source at 50 These DBKs can be powered from a Transformer Rectifier Type Unregulated Power Supply The DBKs in this column use up tol5 VDC 900 mA
191. igital input output port C bit 7 ili NO 3 4 PORT C6 Digital input output port C bit 6 PORT C5 Digital input output port C bit 5 5 6 8 9 J J 7 J 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 37 PORT C 4 Digital input output port C bit 4 Cod oe Keo Cee Tee Od O1 RB GO PO P3 Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O Pin Signal Name DescriptionforP3PinUse 3 6 HSD4 High speed digital I O bit 4 low byte 8 HSD2 High speed digital I O bit 2 low byte S 9 HSD1 High speed digital I O bit 1 low byte S 412 CD S S 13 WR 14 RD S High speed digital I O bit 10 high byte AOUT2 Clock Analog output 2 optional LBK2 16 bit 100 kHz 10 VDC DAC os oe oo oe eo ie LogBook User s Manual 957096 System Expansion 4 9 Notes 4 10 System Expansion A LogBook User s Manual DBK Basics This DBK Basics section of the manual does not apply to DaqBoard 500 Series or DaqBoard 1000 Series boards Those boards are not intended for use with DBK options nor will they support such options Introduction 1 How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device 2 Connecting DBKs to DaqBook 100 200 Series Devices ISA Type DaqBoards amp LogBooks 2 Connecting DBKs to Dag PC Cards 3 Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard 2000 Series Boards 4 Connecting DBKs to DaqBook 2000 Series Devices 5 DBK Identification Tables 9 Analog Outpu
192. igure If no devices are configured the device inventory field will remain blank The figure shows the first and second configuration windows overlapped 34 LogBook Configuration 3 44 LogBook Configuration Device Inventory LogBook Properties Test Hardware el Computer Device Settings Device Name Connection Type Parallel Port bd Device Connection JLPT1 Protocol ECP Device Timeout ser E Device Resources Resource Type Setting Interrupt Request oF Input Output Range 0378 O37F Input Output Range OF 78 OF FF Properties Add Device cA Estad Ea LogBook Configuration Windows The four buttons across the bottom of the first configuration window previous figure are used as follows e Properties Configuration settings for a device can be changed or modified from the corresponding properties window To do so double click the device icon or single click the device and then single click the Properties button The second configuration window will appear for the selected device as shown in the previous figure e Add Device The Add Device button is used to add a device configuration whenever a new device is added to the system LogView cannot recognize a device unless listed in the configuration window e Remove The Remove button is used to remove a device from the configuration A device may be removed if it is no longer installed or if the device s configuration no longer applies e Close Th
193. ion P4 to P1 Adapter Board Pi pops P4 to P1 P2 P3 Adapter Board AA Pa P4 to P1 P2 P3 Adapter Board with Screw Terminals P1 P2 P3 P4 A module version of DBK202 MATI J PA A module version of DBK202 with an included CE cable kit P1 P2 P3 P4 P4 to TB1 12 slot Screw Terminal Block for DaqBoard 2003 TB1 12 slt P4 P4 to P1 P2 P3 Adapter Board with Screw Terminals P1 P2 P3 P4 P4 to P1 P2 P3 Mini Adapter Board P1 P2 P3 P4 3 card slots Screw Terminal amp Expansion Module 16 Connector BNC Interface Module with Screw Terminals P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 DBK215 16 Connector BNC Connection Module with Screw Terminals SCSI 68 for use withDagBoard 500 Series and DaqBoard 1000 Series P1 P2 and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard 2000 Series or 2000c Series boards but are obtained by using P4 adapters DBK200 series These adapters typically connect to the DaqBoard 2000 Series 2000c Series 100 pin P4 connector via cable DBK215 is only for use with DaqBoard 500 Series and DaqBoard 1000 Series It cannot be used with DaqBoard 2000 Series devices An asterisk in the I O column indicates that the associated device includes screw terminal blocks Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 11 Power Supply DBKs Power supply type DBKs are typically used in laboratory automotive and field applications Input power can come from any 10 to 20 VDC source or from an AC source by using an approp
194. ion enter the commands and reset the baud rate in this order Type Type Type Type Type DAunRWN sp00 press lt Enter gt wb0 press lt Enter gt Zb0 press lt Enter gt m gt press lt Enter gt sd01 press lt Enter gt This sets the protocol mode to point to point transparent mode This sets the modem unit for Remote operation This is the default setting Disables the Banner Display This is the Save command Sets the Baud Rate to 115200 In the Baud Rate Box lower right of screen change the baud rate to 115200 as indicated in the previous figure 7 Type m gt press lt Enter gt This is the Save command Frequently Asked Questions Q I ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device LogBook Serial Fixed It did not connect What should I do A Try the following a Turn OFF the LogBook then restart it to initialize the configuration b Verify that the proper RS232 cable is connected c Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of the configuration downloaded to the LogBook d Verify that the Serial Ports on both the LogBook and on the PC work Q I ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device LogBook HopNet It did not connect What should I do A Try the following a Turn OFF the LogBook then r
195. ion character and parsing the next two characters The second channel would be configured for Sx_Float so that fractions of seconds could be read and would use a format string of SGPGGA 4u f Notice the seconds channel throws away the four characters that make up the hours and minutes and parses the remaining characters as a floating point number The ASCII value of a single character can be read using the c format specifier So the latitude hemisphere character N would be read as a decimal 78 the ASCII value of N If the channel type is set to Sx_Char the value of the channel would be 78 but the LBK1 would display N The following table demonstrates various ways to parse the information contained in the GGA line Ignore UTC time and convert Latitude value This value is in ddmm mm format Channel value may jump when degrees change and channel resolution may be large GPGGA f f Joc Ignore UTC and Latitude convert N S character The value will be recorded as decimal equivalent of the ASCII N XX decimal or S XX decimal GPGGA f f c Mf Ignore UTC Latitude N S character convert Longitude in the format ddmm mm GPGGA f f c 3u Ignore UTC Latitude N S character convert Longitude degrees only GPGGA f f c 3u of Ignore UTC Latitude N S character Longitude degrees convert floating point Longitude minutes only GPGGA f f c f c
196. ipulate input channel values for a more useful output perhaps the quantity of interest cannot be measured directly but depends on a complex derivation from several measurements e Control external devices via digital output signals like a simple Programmable Logic Controller 989592 Software Reference Note Calculated channels can have numeric values such as analog channel values Calculated channels can also have digital values of O or 1 These channels can be stored in any one or all 4 timebases set up in the Acquisition Configuration Window in the same manner as other input channels User Input Box Equation Add New Cut Paste Appears as needed Assistan Channel El Calculated Channel Configuration Edit ox r Channel Configuration Enter function expression P1_CH14 gt 23 y e a Bits ii User Label Calculation Function 00 1 CALC 00 And P1_CH15 gt 24 Yes P1_CH14 P1_CH15 Volt Yes P1_CH14 2 Voltx2 Yes cS function expression hor the calculated channel Type in desired expression or use default Calculated Channel Configuration Windows with Calculation Function Examples You can access the Calculated Channel Configuration window from the control window s View pull down menu or by using the Calc fx button The window contains several columns that are easy to understand because of their labels and their similarity to columns previously discussed The Calculation Function column is a noted exception tha
197. is for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 8 5 x 1 40 Category Legacy Chassis pa 3 SS These dimensions apply to the following DaqBook 100 120 112 200 216 DBK1 DBK10 DBK23 DBK24 DBK30A DBK43A DBK50 DBK51 DBK52 DBK53 DBK54 DBK203 DBK204 TempBook 66 WaveBook 512 WaveBook 51 2H WBK10 WBK10H WBK10A WBK14 WBK15 WBK16 WBK17 q P Ss K 7 7 Q Dimensional Drawings 878394 DD 3 Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 8 5 x 1 72 Category Modern Chassis MAIA AAdIS LINA 05 8 L These dimensions apply to the following DaqBook 2000A DBK34A DBK70 LogBook 300 WaveBook 516 WaveBook 512A WaveBook 516A WBK18 META INOW 00 TT 00 TT META OL REAR VIEW MHTA adits NVa DD 4 878394 Dimensional Drawings Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 8 5 x 1 72 Category Legacy Chassis S39V1d clo 3 These dimensions apply to the following DBK34A DBK70 LogBook 300 WaveBook 516 WaveBook 512A WaveBook 516A 0 0S y SIIW ld y 2E 8 Dimensional Drawings 878394 DD 5 Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 11 x 8 5 x 2 63 Category Modern Chassis DD 6 MHIA LNOY4 lt SA E Sc J Ea MHIA AdIS NVA MAIA dol HL ce 8 0S y co OOOOOOOOODODODODODO OODODODODOODOODODODOO DOODODODODOODODODODOO DOODODODODOODODODODOO DOODODODODODODOODODOO DOODODODODODODODODOO OOO0O0
198. isition Configuration asks you to determine when how often and for how long to get data readings Trigger pre trigger post trigger conditions and timebases are discussed on page LV 42 e System Calibration allows you to perform 1 point or 2 point calibrations to fine tune system accuracy Monitor e Monitor Acquisition In real time Log View can display system parameters and channel values in a spreadsheet style If so desired readings can be formatted into bargraphs analog meters and digital indicators page LV 54 e LogBook Monitor shows the status of the current acquisition and the LogBook system page LV 48 e Programmed Digital Outputs Used As Alarms The monitoring function can be automated via calculated channels and digital outputs to engage alarms when pre defined conditions occur e Display Recorded Data allows you to graphically view previously recorded data for analysis and comparison via a post acquisition view program The applicable view application 1s covered by PDF documentation that is automatically installed onto your PC s hard drive as a part of LogBook product support during software installation LV 2 LogView 989592 Software Reference System Management LogView allows you to manage aspects of an acquisition in progress and file saving conversion e Direct Acquisition Controls of LogBook include manual triggering and setting reference marks via LogBook Monitor page LV 48 and starting stopping an
199. ith non linear sensors typically condition convert the reading to a linear form Otherwise a non linear analog input signal is difficult to read accurately Careful use of the calculated channels may yield usable approximations in simple limited range conditions SD Reference Notes An example of 2 point calibration 1s provided under the Procedures heading in the LogView section of the user s manual PDF For information on calibrating the DBK16 and the DBK43A refer to the DBK Option Cards and Modules User s Manual PDF LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Qs360 11 System Expansion 4 Expansion and Enhancement Options 4 1 What are LBK Options 4 1 What are DBK Options 4 2 Power Options 4 3 Other Options 4 3 Considerations 4 4 DBK Configuration 4 4 Dimensional and Environmental Factors 4 4 Mechanical Setup Options 4 5 P1 P2 and P3 Port Connectors 4 6 Reference Notes Q e Power Supplies Power Connectors and Calculating Power Needs are topics that are discussed in the DBK Basics section which immediately follows this chapter e The chapter entitled LBK and other non DBK Options discusses several non DBK related options that can be used with LogBook These include COM 422 485 memory expansion LBK1 remote terminal LBK2 Digital to Analog Output and remote On Off switch LED indicator options e The DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 detail
200. itialization is accomplished as follows 1 Place the PC Card in the PC s corresponding socket 2 Select the driver according to your card s documentation 3 In LogView under the Device menu click Select PC Card then click OK LogView will check the card and initialize it as needed Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 13 Using LogBook Unattached When using a LogBook unattached Log View does not communicate in real time with LogBook instead LogView downloads the acquisition setup file to a local PC Card that can later be manually transferred to LogBook After the acquisition is complete the PC Card an la PC card manually transferred to and from remote LogBook that collected data in LogBook must be manually transferred to the PC where Log View can then upload the data The PC Card must first be properly initialized L 8 Take any ATA PC Card memory device and insert it into a corresponding socket on the PC If this is the Ist time this type of card has been inserted Windows may require driver information Follow the on screen instructions or refer to the documentation included with the PC Card Launch LogView from your PC unless you set up a shortcut you can find LogView in the Programs group in the Start menu The control window and the Analog Input Channel Configuration window should appear Under the Device menu click Select PC Card Use the drop down list to tell Log View wh
201. ition system and power considerations e DBK options are detailed in DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual p n 457 0905 As a part of product support the manual is automatically loaded onto your hard drive during software installation The default location is the Programs group which can be accessed throught the Windows desktop No matter what the signal input from the transducer DBKs produce output signals suitable for analog to digital conversion ADC The output signals can be bipolar typically 5 to 5 V or unipolar typically Oto 10 V The user can select a range of relevant values to correspond to the lowest and highest signal this range selection guarantees the highest resolution in 16 bit conversion by the ADC Note DBKs vary in their outputs and gain settings Refer to the specifications for the particular DBK used Basic Connection Concepts Most system expansions stem from the 37 pin Signal I O ports P1 P2 and P3 Note that LogBook 360 combines the features and capabilities of LogBook 300 with those of a DBK60 expansion chassis In addition LogBook 360 has a pre installed serial communications card that provides GPS and AUX serial ports as detailed in the chapter entitled LBK and other non DBK Options e Pl Each of 16 main base channels can support up to 16 sub channels and thereby provide expansion up to 256 analog input channels LogBook s channel sequencer scans expansion channels at the same high spee
202. ity RS 232 devices The device must supply an ASCII sentence an ASCII data string terminated by a CR and or LF The device must transmit its data without any inducement Devices that require a data request command from the controller are not supported The size of a terminated sentence cannot exceed 255 characters Integers 32 768 floats 3 4E 38 with 6 digits of decimal precision and character 128 types are accepted Like all other input channels in the LogBook system serial channels can be used in equations defining calculated channels and or used in the definition of the trigger or stop events 1200 2400 4800 9600 38400 57600 115200 General serial devices can be attached to either port 1 and or 2 but a GPS device can only be attached to Port 1 The LogBook s analog and digital input channels are synchronously sampled at the specified rate s using an internal or externally supplied sample clock Serial devices provide data to the LogBook asynchronously to its sample clock When a serial input string 1s parsed and converted its value is placed in temporary storage When the sample clock fires the current value in temporary storage is scanned along with the analog and digital input channels and written to the LogBook s non volatile PC Card memory If the sample rate associated with the serial channel is slow relative to the transmission speed of the serial device the temporary storage may be updated sev
203. k User s Manual Appendix A 887997 Supplement HopNet Modems A 1 Configuration via LogBook Software In order to accommodate the necessary configurations we must specify alias names in the Logbook Configuration Applet In the LogBook Configuration Applet located in the Windows Control Panel we will see four Port Setups Each will need configured to ensure proper serial port communications via the HopNet modem The four devices are Configure the Parallel Port Setup for Device LogBook Parallel 1 Configure the Serial Port Setup for Device LogBook Serial 1 2A e Parallel Port Setup necessary to establish communication for setting up the serial port e Serial Port Setup this is the Standard Serial Port Setup for LogBook e Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for LogBook e Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for HopNet Navigate from the Windows Desktop as follows Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt LogBook Config Double click on the LogBook Config icon to open the applet Click lt Add Device gt Set the Properties via the LogBook Properties Tab as follows Device Name LogBook Parallel Connection Type Parallel Port Device Connection LPT 1 Protocol ECP Click the lt APPLY gt button Click the lt OK gt button From the LogBook Configuration Applet click lt Add Device gt Set the Properties via the LogBook Properties Tab as follows Device Name LogBook S
204. k was armed on Thursday but did not trigger until Saturday The file last modified date shown as a file attribute in Windows Explorer not LogView Explorer is the date the file was uploaded to the PC Thh mm ss The Time field represents the time the acquisition was initially armed This time is not necessarily the time when the data was actually collected It is possible LogBook was armed at noon but did not trigger until 2 00pm The file last modified time shown as a file attribute in Windows Explorer not LogView Explorer is the date the file was uploaded to the PC Rx The Rate field holds a number from 1 to 4 representing the scan rate for the file If channels are stored at more than one rate a file is created for each rate Bx y The Block field holds 2 numbers x is the trigger block number and y is the segment of the trigger block A trigger block is segmented when partial uploads take place Typically y will be 1 when the entire trigger block is uploaded at once The numbers are generated chronologically as they occur ext The filename extension for the data files and their explanatory header files see following figure Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 9 a File Converter Preferences Data File Ext Header File Ext DlAdem A DAT idiadem ASCII Text Spreadsheet TXT T Vasc SIDADISP DAT HED dacisp o DASYLab ODF DEF dasylab MATLAB OSC matlab E FostView Binary JOT A postview onap Master Bina
205. kind then click Cancel while the upload is taking place Naming Format for Data Files LogView names uploaded data files to make them easy to identify and organize The File Converter Preferences window Represented below allows you to customize LogView s naming process to suit your needs Navigate as follows to access the window View Pull down menu gt Preferences gt File Converter Preferences can be set so e Files will not be accidentally overwritten e The use of several LogBooks is easy to manage e Test times and dates automatically embedded e Itis easy to identify files that are part of the same acquisition The figure and table below define the full field format for data files As described in the next section you may wish to turn off unneeded fields for simplicity Acquisition scan Rate name Date Armed Timebase 1 4 Extension seed FZZZZZZ Pddeami yy Th raiii ee Rx BMS scr LogBook Time Armed Trigger Segment Serial Block of Block seed User supplied identifier string e g TOM1 provides easy identification of files associated with a specific test person or device under test zzzzzz When multiple LogBooks are being used the 6 digit serial number identifies which LogBook was used to collect the data Ddd mm yy The Date field represents the date the acquisition was initially armed This date is not necessarily the date when the data was actually collected It is possible LogBoo
206. l click the Log iew C PROGRAM FILES LOGVIEWSAPPLICATIONS Untitled Ivc GPS Serial Input tool in the toolbar This action will expose the channel grid used to set up the desired serial Ep da haa a del gt input channels ee 80 pa nge AS THY Nal ESA Each row of the grid represents a serial input channel Up to 16 serial GPS Serial Input Channel Configuration input channels can be S1_Fiot El needed enable hemin Li oo me An ser cHoo SERCHO e ee the On Off column then AM ser_cHor SER CHO SER_CHO2 SER_CHO2 select the channel type A en semen from the drop down list M5 ser_cHos SER_CHOS x The Units and User sERCHOE senco Jo si Z E Label columns hold a user entered string that 1s stored with the data for data readability but have no effect on the acquisition The Channel Type and Format String columns define what will be read from the serial device and stored in the associated LogBook channel In the Channel Type column both the serial port and data type are specified When an integer character or floating point input is selected LogView will automatically insert the required directive into the format string The user can then add additional optional formatting parameters but the format string must always end with the directive initially inserted by LogView or a directive of the same number type 6 6 GPS and S
207. l channels are scanned at the base rate but they may also be scanned at divisions of the base rate Two advantages to averaging are noise reduction by limiting the effect of extraneous readings and storage savings since fewer values are stored e Averaging Checking this box the readings from the base rate will be averaged and the average value will be entered for the derived rate scan If the scan rate B is 1 4 of the base rate A then four A readings will be averaged for each B reading e No averaging Not checking this box the readings at the derived scan rates will be exactly the same for that time point as the base rate Event Marking Time Stamping The top right side of the Acquisition Configuration window allows you to manually mark events and or insert an absolute time reference for each scan e Enable Event Mark sets up the acquisition for an operator to press the lt Event Mark gt button in the LogBook Monitor window or on the LBK1 remote operation terminal Whenever the button is pressed that data point is added to the data file e Enable Time Stamp sets up the acquisition to automatically add the time to ms and date to the data file for every scan LV 44 LogView 989592 Software Reference Preferences no toolbar icon Software Reference LogView allows you to set various parameters to make your application more useful and convenient These preference settings are divided into 4 tabs as shown in the figures on
208. l down menu Details are provided in chapter 6 Use the code shown below USE THIS CODE TO ENABLE COMPLETE LOGVIEW FUNCTIONALITY ED7B55484273 LogBook Modem Modem and Upload Scheduler Software Support With this software enabled option a modem connected PC can communicate with LogBook virtually anywhere in the world Any Hayes compatible modem can be attached to the LogBook s serial port Both standard desktop and wireless modems are supported The Upload Scheduler is an independent application that allows the user to configure upload events on one or more LogBooks To avoid waiting for a lengthy upload to complete the Scheduler can be configured to perform the upload during unattended off hours For example three upload events could be configured in the Scheduler each for an upload of data at different hours The Upload Scheduler can save valuable time by performing unattended uploads especially in cases where modem connected LogBooks are operating at slow baud rates Note The LogBook Modem option is enabled from the Authorization dialog box selected from LogView s File pull down menu Details are provided in chapter 7 Use the above code LogBook User s Manual 957096 System Expansion 4 3 Remote On Off Switch and LED Indicator Options If LogBook s female DB9 TERMINAL connector is not being used for the LBK1 remote terminal or another device it can be used to connect a remote on off switch and or indicator LED The following chapt
209. lace automatically with each acquisition using the same settings As soon as the previous trigger block is terminated the system immediately re arms itself waiting for the trigger condition to be satisfied The Number of Re arms field allows you to specify how many triggered acquisitions to capture For exception capturing specify the number of trigger blocks that should be collected before data logging is terminated For continuous data logging specify 1 trigger block LV 42 LogView 989592 Software Reference If Absolute Time is selected for the trigger source the window changes as shown in the figure at right The I Infinite Reams Number of Re ams TT parameters include the date and time as well as options gt Trigger Block Definition for re triggering after a specified duration Trigger A wide variety of trigger sources and stop events provide Pane great flexibility in exception capturing If data collection e March B Ha 1998 Ta ns ate i _ 330 is desired only under specific conditions appropriate e TENE trigger conditions can be so specified Besides the W a p trigger event you can define a pre trigger and post Ae euk 1 B Days o B Hours trigger for the trigger block An example of exception o B Minutes TE Secs capturing would be to collect 100 pre trigger scans and 1000 post trigger scans every time a designated channel Using Absolute Time as a Trigger Source read a specified te
210. lect Connection Tyne Seria Por zi the COMx where x is the number of the serial Device Connection COMI communication port that the modem will be using Protocol Rs232 y 5 Click the Port Settings tab Device Timeout fe 5 Device Resources Interrupt Request 04 Input Output Range O3F8 O3FF 34 LogBook Configuration LogBook Properties Port Settings Test Hardware Bits per second e0 y Data bits Bo Parity None Stop bits E Cancel Apply Flow control Cancel Adjusting Port Settings 6 Inthe Bits per Second field select the baud rate of the LogBook and modems see previous figure 7 Inthe Flow Control field select None or Hardware according to the following criteria e fusing a cable with handshake lines select None e If your modems are not setup for hardware handshaking select None e All other instances select Hardware 8 Exit the LogBook Configuration control panel applet Step Y 5 Validate the Connection 1 Launch LogView 2 Select the newly configured LogBook as follows a Expand the Device pull down menu see following figure b Choose Select LogBook A Select LogBook box will appear c Pull down the Select LogBook s Device list and choose the applicable LogBook LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 13 Log iew C PROGRAM FILES LOGYIEW SAF File View Device Tools
211. lly unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales representative Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory 929196 LogBook User s Manual Manual Layout Chapter 1 An Introduction to LogBook discusses LogBook basics and highlights operational features The last part of the chapter contains product specifications QS300 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Includes Installation Procedure QS360 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide Includes Installation Procedure Chapter 4 System Expansion discusses the expansion of LogBook systems in regard to LBK and DBK options Power considerations and pinouts for P1 P2 and P3 DB37 connectors are also included DBK Basics discusses option cards and modules DBKs that can be used to enhance and expand data acquisition systems Note that DBK Basics is not a chapter but an independent document that 1s applicable to this user s manual as well as others Chapter 5 LBK and other non DBK Options discusses the RS 422 485 Communications Card memory expansion remote LogBook Terminal four channel Digital to Analog Output card and three options regarding a remote on off switch and LED indicator Chapter 6 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection discusses the LogBook 360 support for the Global Positioning System G
212. ludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series 3 26 x 8 32 Board Size Category 9d L These dimensions apply to the following DBK2 DBK4 DBK5 DBK 7 DBK8 DBK9 DBK11A DBK12 DBK13 DBK15 DBK16 DBK17 DBK18 DBK19 09 CN N DBK20 DBK21 DBK25 DBK32A DBK33 DBK44 DBK45 DBK80 DBK81 DBK82 Note 1 DBK83 Note 2 a O on LO On Note 1 DBK82 being significantly thicker than other boards does not fit into 1 slot enclosures such as the DBK10 and the DaqBook 216 DBK82 does fit into DBK41 enclosures and in drawer type products such as DaqBoard 260 TMi SLO Note 2 DBK83 makes use of an external screw terminal connector designated as POD 1 see page DD 19 Dimensional Drawings 878394 DD 9 DBK200 Series Boards No Ol RIGHT ANGLE MOUNT DB 37 FEMALE CONNECTOR ECN 192 37F D DaDaDoOo T0 0o a oaDaDnDaDaD ceandanandaoonoaoadanaanog DBK200 Sul 6006400004040 0d0AIADADA a 264K 4DHOAHAHAHAKBHDAABKBABKBAHBHABA Pp 2900F 9090F 9090F 9P 90 F 990P 90 9 y 9I9POO0DIVUDOIODOIUDODOUDODOIUDODOY OS 100 PIN CONN Robinson Nugent P5SOLE 100P1 SR1 TG P4 DBK200 pan 3 855 3 250 Cl 3 a DO o O a o a a D a o a O o Q 9 6 o o o o PA o o o o o o o o o a a ES a o a o a a a a a aaa Sioa Talay Saher inet emer O anar OACI OOOO Vey Ver pet eo O O AO UCA OM CO MODO AO OIDO OOO OA OO aa oia ls o ls e eh e Je ls aa
213. m File Pull down Menu Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 27 B ConTest txt Notepad About LogView File Edit Search Help Untitled Configuration Report Created 3 29 99 10 47 30 AN Clock Settings Analog Inputs All inputs are turned OFF Type Internal Clock Hax Scan Rate 108 8 kHz 8 81 msec period hoe Base Rate 166 6 Hz Digital Inputs Scan Ratet 400 6 Hz divider 1 All inputs are turned OFF scan Rate OFF scan Rated Off Scan Rates OFF Calculated Inputs Trigger Block Settings Pre Trigger Trigger Post Trigger Humber of Re arms Averaging Hark Input Time Stamp Collect B scans When rmed Collect 100 scans 15 On OFF OFF All inputs are turned OFF Outputs Alles PhysicalHame User Label Data Source Initial Value Output Type PhysicalHame User Label Data Source Initial Value Output Type Sample Configuration Report Condensed Image The File Pull Down menu includes an Authorization dialog box If you want to use one of the following features Modem Support Upload Scheduler or GPS Support you must enter an appropriate authorization code We have included the following code to unlock all ED7B55484273 P3 TimerDivisor P3 TimerDivisor None 1 Dec Local Digital P3 Timerbivisori P3 TimerDbivisori None 1 Dec Local Digital Provides the software version number and a statement regarding copyright violations Modem Support Upload Sched Disable
214. m O Device Connection Zoom Extemal 56K LT Voice Phone Number fi 440 555 5555 Device Timeout sec 5 Z OOOO Serial Fort Attached eoma Device Resources Interrupt Request 03 Input Output Range Dar 02FF caca a Adding a Modem as a Serial Device 6 Exit the LogBook Configuration applet LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 5 Step X 5 Validate the Connection 1 Launch LogView 2 Select the newly configured LogBook as follows 7 6 a Expand the Device pull down menu see following figure b Choose Select LogBook A Select LogBook box will appear c Pull down the Select LogBook s Device list and choose the applicable LogBook Log iew C PROGRAM FILES LOGVIEW SAF File View Device Tools Indicators Select PC Card E L Select Logbook Attach j Break Select LogBook DARI Eina Sa ine Hiv pes l Ami pete iti Poca Shop Acoust Interrupt request Lnigeiante Martta ae Erplarer Baud Rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control IH ardware To change these port settings go to Logbook Configuration in Windows Control Panel Attach OF Cancel Selecting a LogBook from LogView s Device Pull down Menu Establish the connection by clicking the lt Attach gt button at the bottom of the Select LogBook screen At this point LogView will attempt to dial out and connect to the remote LogBook I
215. modems explains the following steps X 1 Configure the LogBook s PC Card Settings Page 7 3 X 2 Set Up the Modem Page 7 4 X 3 Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook Page 7 4 X 4 Configure the PC s Communication Parameters Page 7 5 X 5 Validate the Connection Page 7 6 7 2 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Step X 1 Configure the LogBook s PC Card Settings LogBook User s Manual L ze 3 Start Log View From the Log View toolbar click the lt Hardware Configuration gt button On the LogBook Hardware Configuration tree select Serial COMM see figure LogBook Hardware Configuration Configuration Settings F Logbook eee LogBook gt Serial COMM E pee Analog I0 Connection Direct PC Connection P2 Direct PC Connection le Digital 10 Modem l Cellular Moder Po Connection at Fixed Baud lee Analog l0 We Digital 10 51 Serial GPS 52 Serial AL a Serial COMM OF Cancel LogBook Hardware Configuration Selecting Serial COMM and Modem 4 Depending on your application select either e Modem Note 1 e Cellular Modem e Connection at Fixed Baud Note 2 Note 1 If Modem is selected a Modem Init ii e a_i String text box will appear Right side A oE EEE figure The box allows you to enter optional initialization command strings that may be required for t
216. mperature To conserve memory when collecting high speed data use the trigger to take snapshots of information only during the appropriate periods When using a trigger to start the acquisition a pre trigger count can be supplied so that information just before the trigger can be collected and saved LogBook s buffer allows pre trigger data to be stored temporarily until saved in a trigger block The post trigger definition specifies when the data collection activity should end cotiza Ml Infinite Rearms Number of Re armz oo o E Infinite Rearmes Number of Rie armz an E Trigger Block Definition 7 T Trigger Block Definition Pre trigger Post trigger Pre trigger Post trigger Stop on Duration Duration Analog El uk Pre Trigger Setup Post Trigger Setup You can also use a calculated channel as a trigger source but you must use an analog output or digital channel as an intermediary The calculated channel can be based on real channels and user logic to create an analog output channel or a digital output channel that could then be the input for the trigger event or stop event A calculated channel can describe virtually any combination of channel conditions For example you can develop a calculated channel called TRIG and specify it as the trigger channel If the channel s equation is TRIG Temp1 Temp2 gt 50 0 the data collection process will be triggered when the difference between the 2 c
217. must I support the ECP protocol AND be set in the ECP mode PCs made since 1994 probably support the Enhanced Computer Port protocol ECP If your parallel port does not support ECP you can communicate with the LogBook 360 via the RS 232 serial port or you can add an ECP compatible ISA board or PC Card parallel port Setting the PC to ECP mode varies with different computers On some computers you can enter the BIOS Setup utility from Windows Settings or during startup by pressing the F1 function key The Parallel Port Mode property can be found under the Peripheral Configuration group menu item If necessary consult your PC s documentation or your PC s manufacturer To ensure ECP compatibility after proper setup use the Test Hardware utility described on page QS360 10 Before testing make sure LogBook 360 is properly connected powered on and that the Parallel Port Mode is set to ECP in BIOS Setup CAUTION Making errors in BIOS Setup can disrupt your system s operation If test hardware indicates a problem and you have inadequate experience with the BIOS Setup utility consult your System Administrator or other qualified individual Serial Port If the selected device is connected to a serial port the properties window will include the fields shown in the figure at right Baud rate can be set from 1200 to 115200 bits per second default 9600 When all fields have been changed to the desired settings you can cli
218. n Et Dimensional Drawings High Voltage Adapters WBK61 WBK62 0500 eT e dAL gt F60043 dad OSes i a Stron FSUH roo 3250 UEF Ug 0540 ESIE Grou MECO 444 ff cron r en oy h a A34WVHD 620 5200 DD 21 878394 Dimensional Drawings This page is intentionally blank DD 22 878394 Dimensional Drawings Glossary Acquisition A collection of scans acquired at a specified rate as controlled by the sequencer Analog signal A signal of varying voltage or current resistance temperature such as the output of a sensor Many analog signals are in the form of sine waves Analog to Digital Converter ADC A circuit or device that converts analog signals into digital values such as binary bits for use in digital computer processing Bipolar A range of analog signals with positive and negative values e g 5 to 5 V see unipolar Buffer Buffer refers to a circuit or device that allows a signal to pass through it while providing isolation or another function without materially altering the signal Buffer usually refers to a A device or circuit that allows for the temporary storage of data during data transfers Such storage can compensate for differences in data flow rates In a FIFO First In First Out buffer the data that is stored first is also the first data to leave the buffer b A follower stage used to drive a number o
219. n b Verify that the proper RS232 cable is connected c Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of the configuration downloaded to the LogBook d Verify that the Serial Ports on both the LogBook and on the PC work Q I ve tried to attach the Logbook after configuring the Serial Port Fixed Baud Rate Setup for the device LogBook Modem It did not connect What should I do A Try the following a Turn OFF the LogBook then restart it to initialize the configuration b Verify that the proper 9 pin cable is connected to the LogBook from the modem c Verify that the proper 9 pin cable is connected to the PC from the modem d Verify that the modem is connected to the intended hardware e g LogBook PC remote receiver e Verify that the configuration in the LogBook Control Panel Applet matches that of the configuration downloaded to the LogBook f Verify that the Serial Ports on both the LogBook and on the PC work 7 18 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Information for Advanced Users The following information is not intended for the typical user but is provided for possible use by advanced users LbkTapi d11 is used to service the modem connection Itis called through Lbk d11 and LbkXport d11 Exported functions are the same as for the other connection types and include 1bkTAPIOpen opening the device 1bkTAPIClose closing the
220. n following figure the same Baud Rate setting 9600 If the Baud Rate setting is other than 9600 use the N fel The HopNet modem must be properly connected to the computer and must be have 4 pull down list and re set the rate to 9600 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A 887997 Supplement HopNet Modems A 7 ii WinCom24 Ma E View Jools Help Prompt gt 9600 Baud Rate Use the pull down list to re set the DTR DSR RTS CTS DCD RX TX a rate if it is other than 9600 gt a o 2 naho daizan Transmit String Sone nay reat eee Cheat Screen Transmit Stop DTR RTS FI DTR F2RTS FiConfig F5 Echo Fb Transmit F Binary Showing Default Baud Rate of 9600 and Prompt gt 6 Press the lt F3 gt key A prompt gt will appear in the upper left corner of the screen as indicated in the previous figure Commands can now be entered to set one HopNet Modem for Base Local operation and the other for Remote operation Command entry 1s discussed in the following two sections Setting a HopNet Modem for Base Operation and Setting a HopNet Modem for Remote Operation Setting a Modem for Base Operation HopNet Modems have a factory default setting for being Remote units You will need to enter the following commands to set the Modem for Base Local operation In order to enter these commands successful completion of steps listed in the previous section Getting Started with WinCOM24 is required To ensure th
221. n be yes when off key is selected a confirmation screen will ask power Off with yes and no soft keys or no selecting the Off key will immediately turn off the LogBook Baud Rate can select communication speed from listed options Dimensions 7 875 wide x 4 375 long x 1 125 high 200 x 111 x 29 mm 5 8 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual LBK2 Four Channel Digital to Analog Output Option The optional D A output board contains four 16 bit voltage output digital to analog converters with a maximum update rate of 100 kHz per channel The board is intended for waveform generation UUT stimulus and signal feedback Each converter has a fixed full scale output of 10 VDC The board s operation must be programmed through LogView The D A output board has been designed for operation into loads of gt 2000 resistance with lt 100 pF of parallel capacitance The D A board is stable with all capacitive loads however increased capacitive loading will result in longer settling times Name Analog Output Board Offset Error 0 0045 V Output Voltage Range 10 VDC Full Scale Error 0 01 Voltage Resolution 1 LSB 305 uV Settling Time For 20 Volt Step lt 10 us The D A output board is an edge card design and plugs into a 30 pin SIMM socket If not factory installed the D A board can be easily installed by the user as follows WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to all syst
222. n calculate linear constants the scale and offset to correct inaccuracies in its analog inputs see page LV 32 For channels where only one known point can be applied and verified Log View provides offset trimming Click the lt Attach gt button to establish communication with LogBook 2 Click the Analog lt Input gt button to open the analog input spreadsheet Click the 2 Point Calibration tab to expose the calibration columns If some columns are obscured scroll to the right to reveal them or resize the window by dragging the right edge further to the right Note that the default Cal Scale and Cal Offset mathematically applied to each channel are 1 and O respectively right most columns LV 18 LogView 989592 Software Reference El Analog Input Channel Configuration OF ES View Edit Channel Configuration Enter value for the point 2 I 15 Volt Storage Rates DBE Parameters User Scaling fo 2Point Cal Physical Ehannel Point Calibration Channel User Label On Off Reading Range Units Tene EFi CHOG P1_CHO0 1 25 to 1 25 Direct P1_CHO1 P1_CHO1 10 0 to 10 0 Direct BAF CHO P1_CHO2 10 0 to 10 0 Direct P1_CHO3 P1_CHO3 10 0 to 10 0 Direct P1_CHO4 P1_CHO4 10 0 to 10 0 Direct EE 24 Tet ey Fi CHO P1_CHO5 10 0 to 10 0 Direct in pin 5 rn pp P1_CHO6 P1_CHO6 10 0 to 10 0 Direct 24 5 a fr DE Fi CHO P1_CHOF 10 0 to 10 0 Direct 5 mn 5 a Ma BaF CHO P1_CHOS 10 0 to 10 0 Direct oo mn qa P1_CH
223. nal Conditioning DBKs The DBKs that are used for analog signal conditioning attach to transducers and condition their outputs into analog voltages An A D converter located in the primary acquisition device measures the analog voltages There are many signal conditioning solutions available and more are in development Note that DBK high capacity modules require more circuitry than can fit on a compact card Analog Signal Conditioning S S e Product Name Description O ComnectsTo DBK207 CJC Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules 16 channels P1 or P4 DBK207 CJC includes cold junction compensation CJC Notes o P1 P2 and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard 2000 Series boards or 2000c Series boards but are obtained by using P4 adapters DBK200 series boards o For DagBoard 2000 Series devices unless otherwise noted the internal clocks should be set to 100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options DBK12 DBK13 DBK15 DBK19 DBK52 DBK53 and DBK54 See specific DBK section for details o DaqBoard 500 Series boards do not support DBK options DaqBoard 1000 Series boards do not support DBK options DaqBook 2000 AEX devices have P1 P2 and P3 connectors and in addition a P4 connector Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs The following DBKs offer provide various expansion and connection options The stackable 3 slot DBK10 low profile enclosure can be used for up
224. nal observed on a channel at an instant in time When triggered the ADC reads the channel and converts the sampled value into a digital representation Scan A series of measurements across a pre selected sequence of channels xii Glossary 887199 LogBook User s Manual Sequencer Defines and controls the state of the measurement system for each step of a scan Simultaneous Sample and Hold An operation that captures samples from multiple channels at the same instant in time The result is elimination of time skew between measurement of individual channels Single ended mode Measurement of a voltage between a signal line and some reference that may be shared with other channels Also see differential mode Trigger An event to start a scan or mark an instant during an acquisition A trigger can be a TTL signal a specified signal level a button manually or mechanically engaged or a software command TTL Transistor Transistor Logic TTL typically used to communicate logic signals where a logical 0 is defined by a voltage level of lt 0 8V and logical 1 is defined as 2 4 5V Unipolar A range of analog signals between zero and some positive value e g 0 to 10 V LogBook User s Manual 887199 Glossary xiii This page is intentionally blank xiv Glossary 887199 LogBook User s Manual
225. nce Notes Depending on the nature of your LogBook system you may find one or more of the following references to the LogBook User s Manual PDF helpful The PDF manual is included on the Data Acquisition CD and is also available on our web site O For system block diagrams and operational overviews refer to Chapter 1 of the PDF O For information on system expansion and calculating system power refer to Chapter 4 and to the DBK Basics section O For information regarding LBK options refer to Chapter 5 o For specific DBK card information refer to the DBK Options Manual PDF The following hardware connection figure and procedure are generic details vary with system complexity For unattached mode insert pre configured PC Card Note A LogBook 300 front panel LogBook 300 rear panel e ERROR e o er O TERMINAL SERIAL PORT P1 ANALOG VO P2 DIGITAL I O Belts FREQUENCY e TRIGGERED SPEED DIGITAL VO ar e ACTIVE 5 O io cars Pl AN 2 Connect DBK options to LogBook Use CA 37 x cable x is the number 1 Connect LogBook s SERIAL or of devices to be connected PARALLEL port to the corresponding l reli eee PA PC port AC to DC Adapter 3 Connect DBK options to transducers The use of channel labels is recommended for complex systems 4 Connect AC adapter from AC outlet to LogBook s DINS connector and tighten DINS locking ring Note Other power options are discussed in Note A T
226. ncluded AC to DC adapter or optional DBK34A UPS Battery Module DC power sources such as a car batteries must supply 10 to 45 VDC and use the correct DINS pinout see figure A locking DINS connector assures a secure power connection for applications subject Pin 5 is not used to vibration and thermal stress RTN DINS Power Input Connector As seen on LogBook 360 Front Panel Hardware Configuration Reference Notes Refer to the device specific sections of the LBK options chapter in the user s manual PDF and the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual PDF for information regarding these devices Note that certain DBK options require manual configuration LogBook 360 s top cover does not need to be removed except to add or remove an LBK option or to replace the fuse Most LogBook 360 configuration is done via software as described in section LogBook 360 Device Configuration LogBook 360 configuration does not require the setting of jumpers or switches unless the RS 485 communication option is being used LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide QS360 7 LogBook 360 Device Configuration Qs360 8 A configuration utility is supplied via a control panel applet The LogBook Configuration applet allows you to add a device remove a device or change existing configuration settings From this same window you can also access a built in utility to test the connected device for current setup and performance LogBook Configu
227. nd SER_CHO3 is the fix quality from the GPS LogBook GPS Specifications Supported Protocol NMEA 0183 Required NMEA 0183 Message GGA Electrical RS 232 Connection DB9 female connector Baud Rate 4800 Baud LogBook User s Manual 958396 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 6 13 Notes 6 14 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 What is a Modem A modem MO DULATOR DEM ODULATOR 1s a device which can convert data to a form capable of being transmitted by wire and or radio frequency to a second device of the same nature The second device also a modem reconverts the data to its pre transmission state A pair of modems provides a convenient way for two distant devices to communicate with each other Modems typically fall into one of two categories 1 Telephone modems and 2 Short haul modems This chapter discusses the use of both types of modems with LogBook To use a modem system with LogBook you will need to refer to the documentation that was packaged with your modem in addition to the applicable section s of this chapter Telephone modems take advantage of existing Short haul modems communicate via radio frequency telephone lines to communicate with other such transmitter or cable to a reasonably close device usually modems throughout the world within a distance of a or 2 kilometers 1 km Logbook Short haul Short haul C
228. nd make use of various termination panels For user convenience a card drawer can be slid free of the device The following steps should be used when adding removing or changing cards Refer to the following figure as needed 1 Turn off system power and disconnect LogBook 360 Turn power off to the LogBook 360 and all connected devices Disconnect LogBook 360 from the system 2 Remove top cover If you need to make any change on the LogBook motherboard you will need to remove the top cover Otherwise the cover can remain in place To remove the top cover simply remove the two top cover screws and slide the cover free of the device 3 Remove card drawer A Remove the two screws that hold the card drawer to the chassis B Loosen the three termination panel thumbscrews C Carefully pull the card drawer free of the chassis 4 Remove termination panels For each termination panel remove the two screws that mount it to the card drawer then remove the termination panel 5 Determine power requirements Depending on the power needs of your system s DBK cards you may need to add a power card Refer to the DBK Basics section of the LogBook User s Manual PDF in regard to calculating your system s power requirement If the required power is more than the available power your system will require auxiliary power One of two power supply cards can be used with LogBook 360 e DBK32A This DBK supplies 15 V for u
229. nect Board Card Drawer Termination Panels 3 Located in LogBook 360 Connects to J1 on Interconnect Board 1 per DBK Card Chassis Front Panel in LogBook 360 Chassis Interconnect Board s J3 connects to LogBook 300 s P1 via ane o Fault 16 bit 100 kHz protection Analog to Digital circuits Converter C ir Gain select MIRUA per channel Control VA 100 kHz Random access clock I O 4 digital outputs 37 MY channel gain p4 for high speed sequencer 2 C channel expansion amp le k 2 gain select outputs for SERIAL expansion boards Sequencer JE AUX or aaa S o plc aad Programmable Pa Signal sequencer timebase cae SERIAL 10 us to 10 hrs ata O ji GPS I O 2 C 1 TTL input 1 TTL trigger input 1 Pacer clock I O PARALLEL PORT ll ECP mode O Bil 2 All er Controller E ell ll Y SERIAL COM O 5 digital 1 O lines 7 ridad O iif RS 232 or RS 422 485 o TERMINAL O i TO LBK1 gt o OD at ZE 0 50a Gan LBK1 LogBook ma a E Remote Termina ois optional wo YN Y ul NOS 35 LBK2 4 Channel Analog Output 00 16 bit 100 kHz D A Converter i Removable PC Card 10 to 10 VDC optional Hard Disk or Flash Memory POWER IN There are two sets of P1 P2 and P3 connectors The ones with an i I l Protection fuse Input filter and Converter asterisk are on the motherboard gt reverse diode current limiter Regulators internal to the LogBook 36
230. nels Crosstalk often causes signal interference more commonly referred to as noise Data Logger A system that efficiently saves relatively large quantities of data to a suitable memory media LogBook User s Manual 887199 Glossary xi Digital A digital signal is one of discrete value in contrast to a varying signal Digital data is represented by combinations of binary digits Os and 1s Digital to Analog Converter DAC A circuit or device that converts digital values binary bits into analog signals Differential mode The differential mode measures a voltage between 2 signal lines for a single channel Also see single ended mode Differential mode voltage Differential mode voltage refers to a voltage difference between two signals that are referenced to a common point Example Signal 1 is 5 VDC referenced to common Signal 2 is 6 VDC referenced to common If the 5 VDC signal is used as the reference the differential mode voltage 1s 1 VDC 6 VDC 5 VDC 1 VDC If the 6 VDC signal is used as the reference the differential mode voltage 1s 1 VDC 5 VDC 6 VDC 1 VDC DIP Switch A group of miniature switches in a small Dual In line Package DIP In systems where configuration can not be made through software alone DIP switch settings or jumpers are often used to configure the hardware In many cases a software setting that matches the hardware setting must be made DIP switches are often used for addr
231. nfigured from the PC through LogView After the PC Card is configured it is inserted into LogBook s PC Card slot located behind the front panel door Reference Note Information pertaining to PC Cards can be found in chapter 1 and in the LogView section of the LogBook User s Manual PDF 2 Connect LogBook 360 to the DBK cards and modules For connecting internal DBK cards refer to the earlier section entitled Setting Up the Card Drawer Most analog DBKs connect to P1 digital DBKs generally connect to P2 Refer to the DBK Options Manual 457 0905 in regard to your particular DBKs and for general DBK installation details The CA 37 x cable can daisy chain several DBKs including the DBK41 which has a built in P1 bus connection for 10 DBK cards The x in the cable part number refers to the number of devices that can be connected a CA 37 1 actually has two DB 37 connectors Note Chapter 4 of the LogBook User s Manual PDF includes pinouts for LogBook 360 s P1 P2 and P3 connectors CAUTION IN For analog signal inputs via P1 do not exceed 35 VDC or 45 VDC f Exceeding these limits could result in equipment damage 3 Connect DBK s to transducer s Follow instructions for particular DBK as described in the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual and for the particular transducer Some DBKs can accommodate both BNC and screw terminal connections 4 Connect LogBook 360 to a suitable power source such as the i
232. ngly reduced The system does not automatically compute an optimum scan rate for you However LogView will generate an error message in the LogBook Monitor window if timing problems occur and the following sections explain such problems and how to solve them External TTL Trigger and Stop Events An external TTL trigger can repeat before the trigger block completes extra trigger signals will be ignored Likewise multiple stop signals received before restarting the next scan will be ignored Such ignored signals are noted in the LogBook Monitor window as Eosing Trigger Events and Losing Stop Events Problems Arising From Too Fast a Scan Rate If the user specified scan rate does not provide enough time to complete the necessary tasks of the entire scan list various problems can occur Bear in mind that LogBook places the highest priority on reading input channels it is primarily a data logger Also realize that calculated and output channels are based on input channels and come typically at the end of the scan list Thus if the scan rate is too fast and the next sequence begins before the first is completed the outputs may suffer When outputs can t keep up with the inputs possible consequences include e Missing late Outputs The outputs are not updated in a timely fashion and may not represent their sources in real time LogBook Monitor error message is Outputs Deteriorating e Missed Alarms Digital alarm outputs may not be i
233. nitiated soon enough important alarms might never go off LogBook User s Manual 969591 An Introduction to LogBook 1 11 e Faulty Control Control systems based on digital outputs or a DBK25 could fail if dependent on a fast critical response time e Distorted Outputs Analog outputs may appear to be jaggy or other distortions such as aliasing type errors Ideally each output signal is based on one input resulting in an accurate output waveform Factors such as scan rate number of output channels and calculated channels can overload the system resulting in one output signal for NL multiple input scans The resulting signal deterioration can Slight deterioration of stepped output signal compared increase over time and shows up as a distorted and or lagging to smooth input signal output signal Such output errors can resemble aliasing ay rm errors where output signals are distorted from their input signals because the effective sampling frequency was not i 3 high enough see figure i L A hana cum ob l r Greater deterioration of output signal and a time lag Output Signal Deterioration Solutions To Scan Rate Problems To confirm a suspected timing problem with your acquisition run the acquisition and then check e The LogBook Monitor window in LogView for a corresponding error message e Actual deterioration of outputs as described in the previous section To solve timing problems
234. nnector The P1 pinout is included in chapter 4 Question Why is the Pin 20 for the external clock identified as PCRCLK output input Answer When LogBook is set for an external user supplied pacer pin 20 has an input function When LogBook is set to make use of its internal FPGA Frequency Pulse Gain Amplifier supplied pacer pin 20 is driven as an output This allows instrumentation external to LogBook to be triggered in sync with LogBook scans Question On what edge is the sample taken Rising or Falling Answer Rising edge low to high direction where the minimum pulse high time equals the low time 100nsec For applications with both slow and fast phenomena sampling slow signals at a slower rate while maintaining high rates for fast signals will conserve memory For example channel may read fast signals like vibration and can be sampled at the high base rate channel 2 may read slow signals like thermocouples and can be sampled at a lower rate A Base Rate A and up to 3 more rates B C D can be configured but only one base rate can be defined for the entire system and it should be set for the fastest scan required The B C D rates must be integer whole number divisions of the base rate It is also possible to scan the same channel at several rates Note A separately indexed data file is created for each scan rate The checkbox Apply noise reduction averaging refers to auto averaging for scan rates B C and D Al
235. ns Channels 4 Connector DB37 male P3 Resolution 16 bits Maximum Offset Error 0 0045 V Maximum Gain Error of Full Scale 0 01 Output Voltage Range 10 V Maximum Output Current 10 mA Maximum Update Rate 100 kHz all channels concurrently 5 10 LBK and other non DBK Options 919495 LogBook User s Manual Remote On Off Switch and LED You can use this option to power your LogBook ON or OFF from a remote location One push and release of the button will power the unit on and the indicator LED will light A second push and release of the button turns the unit and indicator LED off Push buttons are available that have the LED and resistor built into the Switch Remote On Off Switch no LED You can use this option to power your LogBook ON or OFF from a remote location One push and release of the button will power the unit on A second push and release of the button turns the unit off Remote LED Indicator You can use this option to indicate when a remote LogBook is powered ON or OFF LogBook Remote On Off Switch and LED Indicator Options The DB9 Terminal connector on LogBook 300 and LogBook 360 can be used to connect a remote on off switch and or an LED indicator If you are not using the par Terminal connector for another option such as the LBK1 remote terminal you may SR find one of the following three remote options convenient 1KO LED Wiring for Switch and LED Indicator Wiring for
236. nu Descriptions LV 25 File Menu LV 25 View Menu LV 30 Hardware Configuration LV 30 Analog Input Channel Configuration LV 31 Digital and Counter Input Channel Configuration LV 35 Output Channels Configuration LV 36 Serial GPS Channels LogBook 360 Only LV 37 Calculated Channel Configuration LV 37 Acquisition Configuration LV 43 Preferences LV 46 complete Log View functionality viii 989492 LogBook User s Manual Device Menu LV 48 Select PC Card LV 48 Select LogBook LV 48 Attach LV 48 Break LV 48 Arm Acquisition LV 48 Stop Acquisition LV 48 LogBook Monitor LV 49 Explorer LV 50 Tools Menu LV 51 Convert Binary Data LV 51 Merging Binary Data LV 53 View Data LV 54 Indicators Menu LV 55 Bar Graph Meters LV 55 Analog Meters LV 55 Digital Meters LV 56 Meters Configuration LV 56 Enable Input Reading Column LV 58 Start or Stop All Indicators LV 58 Appendix A Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual Error Codes Dimensional Drawings Glossary LogBook User s Manual 989492 This page is intentionally blank 989492 LogBook User s Manual An Introduction to LogBook 1 LogBook Basics 1 1 What are LogBooks 1 1 Front and Rear Panels 1 2 Highlight of Features 1 3 LogBook 30
237. nual configuration LogBook 300 s top cover does not need to be removed except to add or remove an LBK option or to replace the fuse Most LogBook 300 configuration is done via software as described in the LogBook 300 Device Configuration section of this document page QS300 5 LogBook 300 configuration does not require the setting of jumpers or switches unless the RS 485 communication option is being used Qs300 4 LogBook 300 Quick Start Guide Upon completing the software installation continue with LogBook 300 Device Configuration LogBook 300 Device Configuration A configuration utility is supplied via a control panel applet The LogBook Configuration applet allows you to add a device remove a device or change existing configuration settings From this same window you can also access a built in utility to test the connected device for current setup and performance LogBook Configuration can be found in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel The Control Panel can be navigated to from Windows desktop Start button as follows Start gt Settings gt Control Panel You can enter LogBook Configuration during driver installation or whenever you wish to add remove or change device configuration settings The first configuration window will display configured devices in the Device Inventory field based on the port they re connected to Devices are represented by an icon and text e g LogBook LPT1 as can be seen in the following f
238. nuous data collection the Upload Scheduler can periodically upload the data to a local PC creating new space on the LogBook s PC Card The Upload Scheduler is discussed in chapter 7 View Data The lt View Data gt button launches an independent post data acquisition view program 1f installed Examples of view programs are eZ PostView and the eZ Analyst set of view applications The Post Acquisition Data Analysis User s Guide PDF documents the applicable application s The PDF document is automatically installed onto your computer s hard drive as a part of LogBook product support at the time of software installation Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 53 Indicators Menu Bar Graph Meters no toolbar icon Analog Meters no toolbar icon LV 54 LogView in a similar way Selecting the Bar Graph Meter icon brings up the Bar Graph window to display several channels in bar graph format To activate the display select the lt Start gt button on the left side of the toolbar or Start All Indicators in the pull down menu or in the toolbar You can vary the number of channels 32 max displayed by selecting the input box at the end of the toolbar The lt Grid gt button next to last item on toolbar is used to arrange the display for convenient reading The pushpin icon in the center of the toolbar locks this window on top of other windows until you unlock it by selecting the pushpin again
239. o Redefinition Not Allowed Macro Header Not Found Program Error Cannot Create Program Illegal Program Name Illegal Variable Name Program Currently Running Program Syntax Error Program Runtime Error Memory Use Error Out Of Memory Referenced Name Does Not Exist Referenced Name Already Exists Incompatible Type Device Specific Error Definitions 300 310 311 312 313 314 315 320 321 330 340 350 360 361 362 363 Device Specific Error System Error Memory Error PUD Memory Lost Calibration Memory Lost Save Recall Memory Lost Configuration Memory Lost Storage Fault Device Out Of Memory Self Test Failed Calibration Failed Queue Overflow Communication Error Parity Error In Program Message Framing Error In Program Message Input Buffer Overrun Query Error Definitions 400 410 420 430 440 Query Error Query Interrupted Query Unterminated Query Deadlocked Query Unterm After Indef Response Power On Event Definitions 500 600 700 800 900 905 906 Lbk Event Power On Lbk Event User Request Lbk Event Request Control Lbk Event Operation Complete Outputs Deteriorating Losing Trigger Events Losing Stop Events Error Codes ec 1 Hardware Errors The following is a list of fatal hardware errors LogBook s ERROR LED indicator on the front panel will blink on off the number of times indicated by the flash code If the LogBook is attached to an LBK1 the corresponding control terminal messa
240. of digital I O For autonomous operation without an attached PC the P2 outputs may be preset before the acquisition The P2 digital outputs may be used as alarm outputs to identify the detection of specified levels in the acquired data P3 Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O Features and capabilities of P3 signals include e Four 16 bit pulse counter channels that can be scanned along with analog inputs e Additional digital I O control lines for high speed digital input and output e Four optional internal 16 bit 10 V analog output channels LBK2 useable for waveform or control output or additional control lines for external analog output expansion The 16 high speed digital I O lines along with the additional digital I O control lines can now be used for real time digital peripherals such as expanded digital input or current or voltage DACs Optional internal four channel 16 bit waveform control 10 V DACs on P3 e Initially setup to a static preprogrammed voltage at the beginning of the acquisition e In the future may be used for waveform or control outputs P1 P2 and P3 Pinout Tables You can connect signals to LogBook s P1 P2 and P3 port connectors using a CA 37 x cable via a D shell 37 pin female connector or a DBK11 screw terminal card with component sockets This page and the next two contain P1 P2 and P3 pinouts TIT AS RS P1 Analog I O SEP FSSSSEESE Pin SignalName__________ Descriptionfo
241. oftware from our website follow instructions provided there 5 From the hardware selection screen select your data acquisition device then follow the on screen instructions Note To enable all LogView features a From LogView s main window open the File pull down menu b select Authorization c enter ED7B55484273 in the dialog box and apply the code LogBook 360 combines the features and capabilities of LogBook 300 with a DBK60 expansion chassis The lower portion of the front panel has three male DB37 connectors P1 P2 and P3 for system expansion and a post for connecting to CHASSIS ground The upper section is nearly identical to LogBook 300 TERMINAL SERIAL GPS SERIAL AUX omon ee eee ese 1651 O TRIGGERED roLek1 To PC OR MODEM gt Eee PARALLEL PORT Rotary Switch PC Card Slot Ole lt sate Swap LED LogBook 360 Front Panel LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide QS360 1 Reference Notes Depending on the nature of your LogBook system you may find one or more of the following references to the LogBook User s Manual PDF helpful The PDF manual is included on the Data Acquisition CD and is also available on our web site For block diagrams and operational overviews refer to Chapter 1 of the LogBook User s Manual PDF For system expansion and calculating system power refer to Ch 4 and to the DBK Basics section For information regarding LBK options refer to Chapter 5 O O O
242. omputer RS 232 Modem T RS 232 Modem Modem Port 1 km i j gt LogBook As LogBook VS gt a Wireles y Computer modem as 230 Short haul Short haul Rg 232 Modem Modem Modem Por Telephone Modem Systems Short haul Modem Systems See Section X pg 7 2 See Section Y pg 7 9 Verify that modem support has been enabled before proceeding through the setup steps Modem support can be enabled through an authorization process as described below To verify that modem support is enabled 2 Authorization 1 Run LogView Enter 4uthorzation Code 2 From LogView s main window pull down the aa odem Support Enabled File menu Upload Scheduler Enabled GPS Support Trial 3 Select Authorization An Authorization box will appear 4 If modem support is disabled enter this code D7 B55484273 Trial status 30 days lett Apply Eade Start susan lial This will enable all three features Checking that Modem Support is Enabled LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 1 Section X Setting up a LogBook with a Telephone Modem For a successful modem operation with LogBook the following must be true e Modem support must be enabled via authorization from within LogView See pg 7 1 Use code ED7B55484273 This code enables complete functionality for LogView e The LogBook must become modem capable via a configuration file saved to its PC Card e The host PC must cont
243. on and return to its idle state The LogBook checks for the auto answer state once a minute when waiting for the next session Modem Not Detected Serial Connection Established In situations in which a modem is not detected but a serial connection is established all modem activities are suspended and will not take up any of the system s processing time LogBook using the instructions for short haul modems These begin on page 7 9 If the instructions for telephone modems were carefully followed but failed to work set up the LogBook User s Manual 958896 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 7 7 Notes 7 8 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Section Y Setting up a LogBook with Short Haul Modems For a successful modem operation with LogBook the following must be true e Modem support must be enabled via authorization from within LogView See pg 7 1 Use code ED7B55484273 This code enables complete functionality for LogView e The LogBook must become modem capable for connection at a fixed baud rate via a configuration file saved to its PC Card e The host PC must contain a LogBook configuration that is setup for dial out capability e One modem must be connected to or installed within a host PC e One modem must be connected to the LogBook s RS 232 DB9 SERIAL COM connector A PC and LogBook can communicate over relatively long distances via short haul modems Although these mo
244. onnected the shielded cable provides greater immunity to noise The CE Compliance chapter includes details pg 8 DBK Basics 967798 Daa Systems DBK Identification Tables Analog Output DBKs Analog Output Product__ Name Description DBK2 Voltage Output Card DBK5 Current Output Card DBK46 Analog Output Card option for designated devices 4 channels Internal PC Board Digital I O Control DBKs Product Name Description_____ O ComecisTo DBK23 Optically Isolated Digital Input Module 24 channels DBK24 Optically Isolated Digital Output Module 24 channels DBK25 Relay Output Card DBK208 Carrier board for Opto 22 Compatible SSR Digital Modules 16 Channels DBK210 Carrier Board for Grayhill 7OM Series Mini Modules 32 Channels P2 or P4 P1 exp Notes o P1 P2 and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard 2000 Series boards or 2000c Series boards but are obtained by using P4 adapters DBK200 series boards o For DaqBoard 2000 Series devices unless otherwise noted the internal clocks should be set to 100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options DBK12 DBK13 DBK15 DBK19 DBK52 DBK53 and DBK54 See specific DBK section for details o DaqBoard 500 Series boards do not support DBK options o DaqgBoard 1000 Series boards do not support DBK options o DaqBook 2000 AEX devices have P1 P2 and P3 connectors and in addition a P4 connector Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics pg 9 Analog Sig
245. ook User s Manual 949297 CE Compliance 8 1 For clarification terms used in some Declarations of Conformity include e pollution degree any addition of foreign matter solid liquid or gaseous ionized gases that may produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity A pollution degree I has no influence on safety and implies the equipment is at operating temperature with non condensing humidity conditions no conductive particles are permitted in the atmosphere warm up time is sufficient to avert any condensation or frost no hazardous voltages are applied until completion of the warm up period Pollution degree II implies the expectation of occasional condensation e overvoltage installation category classification with limits for transient over voltage dependent on the nominal line voltage to earth Category I implies signals without high transient values Category II applies to typical mains power lines with some transients Safety Conditions Users must comply with all relevant safety conditions listed in the Declarations of Conformity and in the user documentation This manual LogBook and Daq device hardware use the following Warning and Caution symbols If you see these symbols on a product carefully read the related information and be alert to the possibility of personal injury A This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical shock unde
246. op Operational Features Data Acquisition Overview Note Acquired data is signal conditioned before it is logged recorded by LogBook The data can be post processed via analytical programs A Sensor Transducer reacts to a physical quantity such as stress strain frequency temperature acceleration light intensity etc and encodes that quantity into an analogous electrical signal A wide variety of transducers produce signals that vary in type and strength some generate a voltage others alter an electrical property As the measured condition changes the analog sensor signal can vary directly or inversely and in a linear or non linear way nel Although LogBook can read volts directly many sensor types still require signal YH conditioning before they can be correctly interpreted The Signal Conditioner changes the raw transducer signal into a voltage for use by LogBook s Analog to Digital Converter ADC Depending on signal quality several steps may be involved e g linearization isolation of high voltages amplification of weak signals attenuation of strong signals filtering of noise and irrelevant frequencies differential voltage measurement simultaneous sample and hold and pulse current to voltage conversions DBK option modules are designed for conditioning a particular type of transducer signal The signal conditioner s output voltage range is sormalized to a user selected range for the measured values N
247. ormat string operates on a series of serial input strings ia p Format Strings Associated with three Serial Channels Serial input string from device LOAD S LACEL S 1 6 1 S 1 LOAD 12 345 lt CR gt lt LF gt 12 345 Failed After rejecting 14 Failed attempting to match 1 characters none were left integer in format string 12 45 23 453 234 lt LF gt Failed 34 After skipping 14 453 234 Three integers attempting to characters the last 2 numbers separated by commas match were converted rejected LOAD tied ee eZ OSS ae OOS SRCR gt Failed 44 Converted first integer Failed after the 1 decimal attempting to after ignoring 1 14 point was encountered The match characters decimal point is neither an LOAD integer nor a comma Valid Conversion Type Specifiers c Any sequence of characters in the input stream of the length specified by the field width or a single character if no field width is specified is matched d A decimal integer consisting of an optional sign followed by one or more decimal digits is matched Leading white space characters are skipped mo e f g A floating point number consisting of an optional sign or followed by one or more decimal digits The e specifier accepts scientific notation 1 e 1 234E 12 while the f specifier accepts non scientific notation values 1 e 1 1234 The g specifier accepts either Leading white space characters are skipped
248. ot be used by other programs however LogView can convert its data files into popular file formats used by other display and analysis packages The conversion can be performed automatically during an upload or manually after the upload using the Convert Binary Data utility found under the Tools pull down menu In addition to providing for file format conversion the Convert Binary Data utility also has the ability to merge Rate files and to concatenate Trigger Block segments Examples follow shortly e When merging Rate files the utility takes the appropriate rate files and combines them into one file e When concatenating segments the utility joins the appropriate segment files making one continuous Trigger Block file e When both Merge and Concatenate are enabled Trigger blocks with multiple rates that were uploaded in segments can all be consolidated into one file The Convert Binary Data utility lists all the raw binary files in the DATA directory Select the desired file s and click Convert to initiate the process In this way any Trigger Block Segment or Rate file can be individually converted Select File s To Convert Es Look in data ka File Folder File Folder aa est mary Data aH Test Rl B1 1 BIN IKB Bi E 10 99 1 34 02 PM est z mary Data a4 a Test R2 B1 1 BIN 1KB Bi O 16 99 1 34 04 PM aa est 1 mary Late 4 Test R3 61 1 61N 1EB Bi O 16 99 1 34 06 PM a est ale mary Data Ei T
249. ote Multi channel DBKs can multiplex several input signals into one of LogBook s 16 main inputs Multiplexing up to 16 analog channels for each LogBook main channel allows system expansion up to 256 analog input channels 1 8 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual LogBook s onboard microprocessor and PC Card allow it to operate independent of a host PC Functionally LogBook can perform e Analog to Digital Conversion The ADC changes a conditioned analog signal to a corresponding digital value LogBook s 16 bit ADC uses 65 536 numbers 2 to quantify values within the specified range and gain Each input channel s buffer amplifier ensures constant input impedance The buffers also eliminate any noise effects from multiplexing of the input signals e Acquisition Control The microprocessor controls the data acquisition by managing trigger conditions gains offsets scan sequencing and data formatting LogBook can continuously collect information or be used for exception capturing with triggers Pre trigger and post triggers allow for capture of specific data thus making more efficient use of memory e Analog and Digital I O With the standard digital I O standard analog input and the optional analog output board LogBook can perform virtually any data acquisition task as well as more complex tasks for alarm and control systems e Data Logging Data can be saved in one of several formats and later downloaded to
250. oxes in the Upload tab of the Preferences window see figure here and discussion on page LV 45 Be aware that simplifying the filename removes the safeguards to prevent 2 files having the same name and causing an overwrite lost information condition If fields are disabled overwrites are more likely to occur The following table suggests when it is safe to turn off various filename fields want to overwrite old data every time perform an upload No optional fields are required only have one LogBook Turn off LogBook serial number field use a new seed every time upload Only the seed option is needed often accumulate multiple acquisitions on the PC Card and Make sure at least the time field is enabled otherwise want to upload them at one time acquisitions will be overwritten as they are uploaded never perform partial uploads Don t need block number LV 10 LogView 989592 Software Reference Example of all parameters LAB1 123456 DO3 15 98 T12 04 12 R1 B1 1 SEED user description string LAB1 LogBook serial number 123456 Date armed March 15 1998 Time armed 12 04 12PM Rate 1 Trigger block 1 Segment 1 Simplest application If a new acquisition is uploaded this file will be overwritten R1 B1 1 Rate 1 Trigger block 1 Segment 1 If all acquisitions are performed in the same day the time can identify the files T12 04 12 R1 B1 1 Time 12 04 12pm Rate 1 Trigger block 1 Segm
251. pin headers JP1 JP2 and JP3 There is no P4 DaqBook 2000A 37 pin connectors P1 P2 P3 and a 100 pin P4 connector DaqBook 2000E 37 pin connectors P1 P2 P3 and a 100 pin P4 connector DaqBook 2000X 37 pin connectors P1 P2 P3 and a 100 pin P4 connector For DaqBook 2000 Series devices DBK connections can be made to Ports P1 P2 and or P3 when applicable For the AEX models a 100 pin P4 connector can be used A discussion of both methods follows The P4 connector on a DaqBook 2000 AEX device shares signal connections with the P1 P2 and P3 connectors P4 offers no additional I O Connecting a DBK200 Series Option to P4 via a CA 195 cable distances the P1 P2 P3 connection from the DaqBook 2000 Series device It does not provide any new signal I O See the following Caution CAUTION Signal conflicts between a DaqBook 2000 AEX device s P1 P2 P3 connectors and its P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage Therefore when connections have been made to P1 P2 and or P3 use caution when making connections through P4 and visa versa Refer to P1 P2 P3 and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook 2000 AEX device The first method is preferable as it introduces less noise Preferred Method a Connect a CA 37 x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector P1 P2 or P3 on the DaqBook 20
252. ple the user wants to use CALC_02 to indicate to sum of two physical channels 1e P1_CH14 and P1_CHIS5 In this example assume that a P1_CH14 reads 25 volts and b P1_CH15 reads 24 volts In this case CALC_02 will be the sum 49 volts Note that CALC_02 can be used in additional equations Example 4 P1_CH14 2 Look at row 4 in the Calculated Channel Configuration screen previous figure You will see that the user created a simple calculation function of P1_CH14 2 for calculation channel CALC_03 In this example the user wants CALC_03 to read twice the value of physical channel P1_CH14 Note that CALC_03 can be used in additional equations Software Retener LogView LV 41 Acquisition Configuration f L The Acquisition Configuration dialog box allows you to define trigger conditions including various A parameters for pre trigger trigger post trigger scan rate and timebase cq LogBook data can be collected in two basic ways depending on the trigger setup e Continuous As a simple data logger in a strip chart mode all data collected is then saved The trigger source can be set to immediate and the post trigger scan count set to infinite e Exception only As an exception capturing system collected data is saved only under specified conditions Pre trigger post trigger and re arm parameters allow you to collect only data around specified events just the data of interest nothing more Thus memory is conserved and post anal
253. plicate signal connections DBK Basics 967794 Dag Systems Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook 2000 AEX Device via P4 Every DaqBook 2000 AEX device has a 100 pin connector designated as P4 The P4 pins correlate to various pins on P1 P2 and P3 The P4 connector on a DaqBook 2000 AEX device shares signal connections with the P1 P2 and P3 connectors P4 offers no additional I O Connecting a DBK200 Series Option to P4 via a CA 195 cable distances the P1 P2 P3 connection from the DaqBook 2000 AEX device It does not provide any new signal I O See the following Caution Signal conflicts between a DaqBook 2000 AEX device s P1 P2 P3 connectors and its P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage Therefore when connections have been made to P1 P2 and or P3 use caution when making connections through P4 and visa versa Refer to P1 P2 P3 and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections A brief explanation of P4 connectivity for DaqBook 2000 AEX devices follows the illustration E To 1070 474000 Series Device P2 for Digital 1 0 You can connect P2 to Digital DBKs Passive DBKs P3 for Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O You can connect P3 to Passive DBKs Only Passive DBK Passive DBK Tia ae Pr Several other DBK200 Series P4 to DB37 adapter options can be used in place of DBK201 Digital DBK
254. quirements 1 The device must not interfere with radio or telecommunications 2 The device must be immune from electromagnetic interference from RF transmitters etc The standards are published in the Official Journal of European Union under direction of CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization The specific standards relevant to LogBook or Daq device equipment are listed on the product s Declaration of Conformity and include CISPR22 1985 EN55022 1988 Information Technology Equipment Class A for commercial industrial use and EN50082 1 1992 for various categories of EMI immunity The safety standard that applies to LogBook and Daq device products is EN 61010 1 1993 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use Part 1 General Requirements Environmental conditions include the following e indoor use e altitude up to 2000 m e temperature 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F e maximum relative humidity 80 for temperatures up to 31 C 87 8 F decreasing linearly to 50 relative humidity at 40 C 104 F e mains supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed 10 of the nominal voltage e other supply voltage fluctuations as stated by the manufacturer e transient over voltage according to installation categories over voltage categories I II and III For mains supply the minimum and normal category is Il e pollution degree I or II in accordance with IEC 664 LogB
255. r noted conditions i This warning caution symbol is used to warn of possible personal injury or equipment damage under noted conditions LogBook and Daq device products contain no user serviceable parts refer all service to qualified personnel The specific safety conditions for CE compliance vary by product but general safety conditions include e The operator must observe all safety cautions and operating conditions specified in the documentation for all hardware used e The host computer and all connected equipment must be CE compliant e All power must be off to the device and externally connected equipment before internal access to the device is permitted e Isolation voltage ratings do not exceed documented voltage limits for power and signal inputs All wire insulation and terminal blocks in the system must be rated for the isolation voltage in use Voltages above 30 Vrms or 60 VDC must not be applied if any condensation has formed on the device e Current and power use must not exceed specifications Do not defeat fuses or other over current protection 8 2 CE Compliance 949297 LogBook User s Manual Emissions Immunity Conditions The specific immunity conditions for CE compliance vary by product but general immunity conditions include e Cables must be shielded braid type with metal shelled connectors Input terminal connections are to be made with shielded wire The shield should be connected to the
256. rP1PinUse _ _ gt 6 GS0 Gainselectlineforexpansioncards _______________________ 7 8 NEGREF 5 V 5 0000 VDC 0 005 A reference usedforvariousDBKs_ Z No Connection S O 10 No Connection 11 Ch 7 LO IN differential mode ch 15 HI IN single ended mode 1 Ch 6 LO IN differential mode ch 14 HI IN single ended mode 1 Ch 5 LO IN differential mode ch 13 HI IN single ended mode 14 Ch 4 LO IN differential mode ch 12 HI IN single ended mode 15 Ch 3 LO IN differential mode ch 11 HI IN single ended mode 16 17 Ch 1 LO IN differential mode ch 9 HI IN single ended mode Ch 0 LO IN differential mode ch 8 HI IN single ended mode Low level ground analog ground use with analog inputs and outputs Ch 1 HI IN single ended mode or differential mode Ch 0 HI IN single ended mode or differential mode 9 Er ie 14 15 EC a LogBook User s Manual 957096 System Expansion 4 7 P2 Digital I O PORT B 1 Digital input output port B bit 1 0 PORTBO Digital input output port B bit 0 2 5 7 J J Digital ground l DAIO h NO Pin not connected not used oo PORT B2 Digital input output port B bit 2 Digital ground o_o h Pin not connected not used O1 Digital ground O Pin not connected not used mb N Digital ground 00 5 V supply 0 100 A do Digital ground i O 5 V supply 0 100 A Digital ground PORT C 7 D
257. ration can be found in the Windows Control Panel The Control Panel can be navigated to from Window s desktop Start button as follows Start gt Settings gt Control Panel You can enter LogBook Configuration during driver installation or whenever you wish to add remove or change device configuration settings The following description applies to either method The first configuration window will display configured devices in the Device Inventory field based on the port they re connected to Devices are represented by an icon and text e g LogBook LPT1 as can be seen in the following figure If no devices are configured the device inventory field will remain blank The figure shows the first and second configuration windows overlapped 341 LogBook Configuration 34 LogBook Configuration Device Inventors LogBook Properties Test Hardware Computer Device Settings ST LogBook1 LPT1 l mo 22899 LogBook2 COM2 Device Name Connection Type Parallel Port Device Connection LPT Protocol ECP r Device Timeout sec E Device Resources Resource Type Setting x Interrupt Request oF Input Output Range 0378 OF Input Output Range OF 78 OF FF Properties Add Device E Cancel only LogBook Configuration Windows The four buttons across the bottom of the first configuration window previous figure are used as follows e Properties Configuration settings for a devic
258. reate a transfer function so LogView will display units that are useful for your application Here you can arbitrarily define your Units apples oranges whatever based on the raw input value typically Volts To do so type your new unit name in the Units column and select an appropriate range e g unipolar Then enter its linear scale relation to the Volt e g 25 pounds per Volt and any offset from O e g the empty basket measures 0 1 V The reading and range columns change accordingly User Scaling Transfer Function 0 User unit 25 lbs LV 32 LogView 989592 Software Reference Storage DBE Parameters User Scaling 2 Pomt Cal Physical Channel Point Calibration Channel Lezi esel L Lii Asc Fange Wot Tarts Actual P1 Actual P2 Cal Scale Cal Dffsel P1 CHOD P1 CHOD On 0 1 to 500 1 Local PI CHO PI CHO On 0 0 to 2000 0 S Local P1_ CHO Fi CHO On 10 0 to 10 0 Volk Local Analog Input Channel Configuration 2 Point Cal Tab Selected Calibration The above figure shows the columns in the 2 Point Calibration tab To fine tune the accuracy of the value coming from a linear sensor Log View provides both 1 and 2 point calibration One point calibration can be used to zero a channel as in a thermocouple which is usually more accurate in scale than offset You might place the thermocouple in an ice bath and set just the 0 C point 2 point calibration determines the scale and offset factors to convert the raw readings into accurate
259. rface uses a control window with toolbar menus and a spreadsheet model Similar to other Windows based programs LogView s user interface will seem familiar and intuitive Windows can be sized and placed to best fit your application Several different meter styles are available to monitor data in real time if so desired Control Window Pull Down Menus and Toolbars Bar Graph Meters Analog Input Channels Select LogBook Merge Binary Data Analog Meters Digital Input Channels Attach View Data Digital Meters Enable Input Reading Column Start All Indicators Stop All Indicators Output Channels Break Download GPS Serial Input Channels f Arm Acquisition Calculated Channels Stop Acquisition Upload Download As Acquisition Configuration LogBook Monitor Configuration Report Preferences Explorer About Log View Use code ED7B 55484273 to authorize complete functionality Exit Log View Pull down Menu Selections Log View pull down menus represented by the above table are discussed in the section Menu Descriptions The following figure shows Log View s control window Note that two sets of toolbar buttons reside just below the menu row Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 5 Toolbar commands can be accessed in two ways 1 via toolbar or 2 via pull down menu selection Note that the pull down menus include additional commands that do not have associated toolbar buttons Log iew
260. riately rated AC to DC adapter The DBK30A rechargeable power supply can power DBK modules where AC mains are not available the DBK30A outputs 28 V for powering transducers For a large number of DBK cards the DBK32A or DBK33 can be installed into an expansion slot The DBK33 is used when 5 V is required in addition to 15 VDC The DBK34 provides a steady 12 or 24 VDC while working with vehicle electrical systems that may be turned on or off during testing Power Supply Name Description DBK30A Rechargeable Battery Excitation Module 12 14 24 28 VDC 3 4 A hr O 14 VDC DBK32A 15 V E 500 mA DBK33 15 V 250 mA 5VO1A DBK34 12 24 VDC 5 A hr 212 VDC DBK34A 12 24 VDC 5 A hr 212 VDC Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System A successful installation involves setting up equipment and setting software parameters In addition to this manual you may need to consult your Daq device or LogBook user s manual DBKs should be configured before connections are made and power is applied This sequence can prevent equipment damage and will help ensure proper operation on startup Many DBKs have on board jumpers and or DIP switches that are used for setting channels and other variables You will need to refer to the individual DBK document modules to ensure that the DBKs are properly configured for you application Prior to designing or setting up a custom data acquisition system you should review the following tips After reviewing th
261. rotocols make it practical to add additional ports such as USB IEEE 488 TCP IP Consult factory for availability of these communication options 1 10 An Introduction to LogBook 969591 LogBook User s Manual Triggering and Scan Timing SD Reference Note For information on defining triggering conditions through Log View refer to the Acquisition Configuration text and screen shots which are provided in the LogView document module If data collection is desired only under specific conditions you can specify appropriate trigger conditions By defining a trigger pre trigger and post trigger you can collect data surrounding a specific event This event can be an absolute time or a defined condition such as a particular analog channel measuring a certain quantity Ifa calculated channel is chosen as the trigger source you have greater flexibility in defining the trigger based on multiple inputs and conditional logic An auto re arm feature allows many successive acquisitions to take place automatically with each acquisition using the same settings LogBook can be triggered by several types of sources including analog and digital triggering multi step triggering multi channel triggering time of day triggering and manual trigger The manual trigger can be implemented in the following ways e With a computer attached you can trigger LogBook from LogView s LogBook Monitor window e Without a computer you can use a manual trigger switch by a
262. rovides a means of selecting channels gains transducer types and various parameters After setting up the configuration on the PC you must download the configuration file to LogBook s PC Card LogBook then uses the PC Card to start the pre configured acquisition During an acquisition LogView can display channel values on its Graphical User Interface in the form of a spreadsheet bargraph analog meter or digital indicator LogBook data can be uploaded to your PC in various data formats Excel SnapMaster MATLAB DASYLab Lotus Quattro and ASCII for compatibility with virtually all post acquisition analysis software e Upload Scheduler is an application that exists as part of the LogBook Modem option Upload Scheduler allows you to configure upload events for one or more LogBooks A scheduled event can be configured to execute one time or periodically with no post configuration intervention by the user The Upload Scheduler is detailed in chapter 7 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler e Post Acquisition Data Analysis programs provide a means of viewing and analyzing data via interactive graphics Refer to the document module for detailed information The post data analysis programs are discussed in an independent document PDF versions of the documents are loaded on to your computer s hard drive during software installation The default location for the files 1s the Programs group which is accessible from the Windows Deskt
263. ry SMA DAT em Automatically delete source data file after conversion Cancel Overeantng Existing Files On Conversion f Validate overwriting of each existing file 7 Overarite all existing files without validation Do not overnite any existing files File Converter Preferences Window This window is reached by navigating as follows View Pull down menu gt Preferences gt File Converter Customizing the File Name w Log iew Preferences General Download Upload Data File Names on Upload I Include file name seed Prompt for file name seed on upload F Include Logbook serial number IY Include date when acquisition was armed IY Include time when acquisition was armed IY Include trigger block segment number Upload Data of Different Subrates To Separate file per each subrate Single file of merged data e Validate save Log iew configuration changes on upload 4 Validate file overwrite on upload Do not upload trigger block if only pre trigger W Automatically delete LogBook data files after Upload all 4 Validate before deleting LagBook data files an Upload il Cancel Help Log View Preferences Window Upload Tab Selected This window is reached by navigating as follows View Pull down menu gt Preferences gt Upload Tab Under certain conditions all filename fields may not be needed To turn off fields simply enable or disable the check b
264. s being monitored by several thermocouples attached to a LogBook The LogBook is to trigger whenever the temperature of the oven exterior is above 50C or at 9 00AM each day The following calculate channel equation yields a true false output that 1s both recorded and used as the trigger source P1_CH00_2 gt 50 Or SER_CHO3 gt 9 The serial channel SER_CHO3 is assigned the Channel Type TOD_Hour GPS Serial Input Channel Configuration O IC fa 5ER_CHO0O SER_CHOO On Degrees eeno lero Jon Mites ETC lt Not pplcabey Yes No aser choz SER_CHO2 On Minutes TODMin lt NotApplicable Yes No agser_ cos SER CHOZ_ On Hows TOD_Hour_ lt NotApplicable gt Yes No MSA ser_ chos SER_CH04 On Days TOD_Day lt NotApplicableo Ves GA ser_CHos SERCHOS Of Sloat es ser chos SER_CHOS of ST Foa es fea ser_cHo7 SER_CHO Off StF es BS 5ER_CH08 SER_CHOS Of Sloat es TE pj lt pg 6 12 GPS and Serial Device Data Collection 958396 LogBook User s Manual Example Application 3 A GPS receiver is attached to the LogBook to record the present fix of the vehicle under test The LogBook is to trigger whenever the altitude is above 1000 meters and the fix quality is equal to 3 The following calculate channel equation yields a true false output that is both recorded and used as the trigger source SER_CHO2 gt 1000 And SER_CH03 3 SER_CHO2 is the altitude from the GPS a
265. s downloaded to the PC Card in the LogBook the LogBook will no longer be capable of serial port communication directly with the PC Reference Note If needed refer to additional PC card information in chapter 1 and in the Log View section of this user s manual 8 Upon completion of the download close LogView Step X 2 Set up the Modem Desktop modems Refer to your modem user s manual to verify whether the device has any DIP switches If a DIP switch is present and is set for DTR set it to DTR Override When DTR Override is set the DR Data Ready LED will light up after turning the modem on Note It is recommended that your modem be set for auto answer if 1t is equipped with this feature Cellular modems Refer to the user documentation that is specific to your modem Set the cellular modem for auto answer Step X 3 Physically Connect the Modem to the LogBook 7 4 1 If your LogBook has the LBK COM 422 485 option installed verify that the option is set for RS 232 communication The option is discussed in chapter 5 See following note If you are using the LBK COM 422 485 communications option you will need to ensure that the option board is positioned on LogBook s internal slot CNS such that the RS 232 communication mode is enabled If your LogBook has the LBK COM 422 485 option and you are uncertain about the communication mode refer to chapter 5 LBK and other non DBK options The chapter s
266. s no longer needed and can be remove 12 Click lt ATTACH gt Reference Note If this procedure was not successful refer to the Frequently Asked Ouestions section on page A 9 of this appendix Setting HopNet Modems for Base and Remote Operations This section describes a set of serial commands that can be used to configure the HopNet modems An application WinCOM24 will be used for entering commands The commands will be used to set one HopNet Modem as the Base or Local unit and the other as the Remote unit Reference Note This section only provides a brief description of commands used for additional information refer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual Getting Started with WinCOM 24 1 Install the WinCOM 24 software included with the HopNet modems 2 Attach the 9 pin cable to 9 pin cable CA 212 from the PC s COMM 1 port to the HopNet modem 3 Turn on the HopNet modem then execute the WinCOM 24 software 4 Inthe Com Port Selection dialog box select Com Port 1 See following figure 5 Click lt OK gt ll ComPost Solecti n Mis ES Pin ta Selaci Com Pon O om zi DTR DSR RTS foron El 7 i Tl gt i Mode re gt Bao Tronsmii Sting M Binary Mode Ma PR Cies Gape Trerarr Shop DTR ATS FOTA FATS Fi Conig FSEcho F Transmit F Binary ComPort Selection Dialog Box Selecting Com Port 1 The default Baud Rate of 9600 will be see
267. s on and off when the menu item is repeatedly selected Note With the input reading columns ON no modifications to program parameters may be performed Start or Stop All Indicators no toolbar Starting or Stopping all indicators affects several windows if open including Reading column icon Charts Bar Graph Meters Analog Meters and Digital Meters Note Youcan start or stop any of these active windows separately using their own Start or Stop Pause buttons Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 57 This page is intentionally blank LV 58 LogView 989592 Software Reference Appendix A A A Supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual Introduction A 1 Hardware Setup A 1 Configuration via LogBook Software A 2 Testing the LogBook and Modem Connectivity A 4 Setting HopNet Modems for Base and Remote Operations A 7 Frequently Asked Questions A 9 Introduction This document serves as a supplement to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual It provides instructions for configuring Logbook 300 and LogBook 360 devices to enable RS232 communications via a HopNet wireless modem using standard Serial Protocol and Serial Fixed Baud Rate Protocol Note that the HopNet 10 Series modems are transparent to Log View and that no commands are necessary for using Cirronet s HopNet modems with Log View Reference Note A The HopNet 10 Series Wireless
268. s optional DBK cards and modules and addresses DBK power issues As a part of product support the manual is automatically loaded onto your hard drive during software installation The default location is the Programs group which can be accessed throught the Windows desktop Expansion and Enhancement Options A variety of cards and modules can be used to expand and enhance LogBook systems These options are found in three categories LBK options DBK options and other In addition to being discussed briefly below LBK options are detailed in the following chapter and DBK options are detailed in the DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual p n 457 0901 The other options are detailed in this chapter What are LBK Options LBK options are LogBook add on features that can be used to enhance your system The LBK options described briefly below and are detailed in the following chapter LBK COM 422 485 RS 232 Board with an RS 422 485 Option The standard LogBook communications board supports RS 232 only However the LogBook can be purchased with the additional capability for RS 422 and RS 485 These optional boards p n LBK COM 422 485 have circuitry for all three communication protocols LBKMEM1 or LBKMEM1U 16 MB DRAM Memory Expansion The standard 4 MB RAM can be user replaced with a 16 MB board LBK MEM1 U The expanded memory creates a larger data buffer allowing more time to swap PC Cards This is convenient when using fa
269. se with a LogBook DaqBook or DaqBoard e DBK33 This DBK supplies 5 V and 15 Vfor use with Log Book DaqBook DaqBoard or Daq PC Card Top Cover Screws Steps 2 and 15 P1 Interconnect Board Detail a _ JP1 Jumper SA e ER Various setups p2 step 6 a GE SIE Jumper Thumbscrew 1 per panel Card Drawer to Steps 3B and 13C Chassis Connector Chassis 4 Termination Panel 1 of 3 Shown with cover removed Standoff 2 per card DB37 1 of 3 on Interconnect Board DBK Card Termination Panel to Connects to DB37 Steps 4 and 12 amp o Ta 8 Card Drawer Screws Steps 7A and 10A 2 Card Drawer to A Chassis Screw z 1 of 2 Chassis Screw DBK Card to 1 of 2 E OS Card Drawer Screws 1 of 2 Steps 3A and 13D Steps 7B and 10B Card Drawer to Leave jumpers JP1 and JP2 in place unless a DBK33 is being used If a DBK33 is being used configure the P1 interconnect board according to the table presented in step 6 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide QS360 3 6 FOR DBK33 USERS ONLY Configure the P1 interconnect board for power source This step only applies when a DBK33 is being used with the system If you are not using a DBK33 skip to step 7 5V Power Source The schematic to the right shows the LogBook 360 jumpers JP1 and JP2 which are used to distribute the LogBook s 5V power supply Internal P1 Bus DBK cards that attach to the LogBook s P1 bus need 5V 15V and
270. ser specified PC Card drive specified in the Select PC Card dialog box Break allows you to break the connection with an attached LogBook 5 T Ti Ll Arm Acquisition Arms the acquisition for the selected device The scan will begin when the selected trigger condition is met Stop Acquisition will disarm the acquisition for the selected device No data will be collected despite trigger conditions until the acquisition 1s armed started se lv Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 47 LogBook Monitor has no toolbar icon 1t is selected from Device Menu only LV 48 When selected from LogView s Device pull down menu the LogBook Monitor provides a system status report on the current acquisition if in progress The acquisition status is only updated every or 2 seconds Note that the status for scans at faster rates may not be updated before the scan is finished Most of the monitor s information is self explanatory Items that may not be obvious or which may need additional explanation are discussed below LogBook Monitor Acquisition Settings Name MYDATA Pre Triager Acq Acquired Scars f 66483 Trigger Block H fi 1 Event Mark Clock 2 jun E 2003 10 07 44 AM Mas Swap Time E sec 3 ear Error Status Errar lock Show Error 15 x Number re arms lo Base scan rate f BEBE Hz Manual Stop Event Type Duration 6 Manual Trigger
271. set the software parameters as needed for your application The software must recognize all the hardware in the system Measurement units and ranges should be checked to verify that they meet your application requirements Remember to set all channels to the proper mode for your DBK or other signal source After your system is up and running verify proper data acquisition and data storage Verify system accuracy adjust ranges or calibrate as needed Device specific information regarding system setup and expansion can be found in the Daq and LogBook User s manuals and in the applicable DBK document modules of this manual If you are considering system expansion review the DBK10 DBK41 and DBK60 document modules The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system For just a few cards use the stackable 3 slot DBK10 low profile expansion enclosure For more than six cards use the 10 slot DBK41 DBK4Is can be daisy chained to one another to handle a large number of DBKs In regard to power management you should review the DBK30A DBK32A and DBK33 document modules For portable applications the compact DBK30A rechargeable power supply can provide power to the DBK10 or DBK41 The DBK30A also includes a 28 V output for powering 4 to 20 mA transducers For applications with many DBK cards initially or in future expansion the DBK32A or DBK33 can be installed into any expansion slot The DBK32A provides 15 VDC and the DBK33 prov
272. st scan rates Note that the 16 MB memory option can also be installed at the factory LBK MEM1 LBK1 Remote Terminal with LCD Screen LBK1 provides a keypad to control the system s basic operation when no PC is attached and a LCD screen for viewing system status A special rack p n Mountl is available to attach the LBK1 to the top of LogBook For applications in harsh environments a special enclosure can be used to shield the unit from water and thermal stress LogBook Users Manual System Expansion 4 1 LBK2 4 channel Digital to Analog Output card The LBK2 Digital to Analog output board contains four 16 bit voltage output digital to analog converters with a maximum update rate of 100 kHz per channel The board is intended for waveform generation UUT Unit Under Test stimulus and signal feedback Each converter has a fixed full scale output of 10 VDC The board s operation must be programmed through LogView What are DBK Options DBK option cards and modules exist for signal conditioning analog output system I O auxiliary power and expansion Various sensor types are accommodated including high voltage current strain gages thermocouples isolation relays accelerometers filtering and simultaneous sample and hold Q Reference Notes e Fora general introduction to DBKs refer to the DBK Basics section of this manual The text discusses the various categories of DBKs connectivity issues tips on setting up a data acquis
273. step 4 Detach and step 5 Power OFF will result in a failure to initialize configuration changes Turn the LogBook ON Open the DEVICE pull down menu item Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option Select LogBook Serial Fixed Note The Baud Rate is 19200 It should match the baud rate set in step 1 10 Click lt ATTACH gt Reference Note If this procedure was not successful refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section on page A 9 of this appendix Note that a successful connection 1s required to continue LogBook User s Manual Appendix A 887997 Supplement HopNet Modems A 5 Test the Serial Fixed Baud Rate for LogBook HopNet Making the Initial Setup Ed 9 Using the 9 pin Serial cables CA 212 connect a HopNet Modem to the PC s COM1 port Connect the second HopNet Modem to the LogBook s COM Port Note that this COM Port is used for LogBook serial communications It is important that you use a CA 212 Cable for the Modem serial connections If you use a CA 47 Cable improper signal connections will result Make sure that the Parallel Port cable is still attached to the Logbook This parallel connection will be needed until the configuration is 100 complete In LogView open the DEVICE pull down menu Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option A list of configured devices should display Select LogBook Parallel Click the lt ATTA CH gt button Press the lt H W gt button This is
274. t CNS see figure The CNS 72 pin socket holds the RAM Memory Board 3 Using ESD precautions depress CN5 s two release clips and remove the 4 MB board 4 Using ESD precautions insert a 16 MB board LBK MEM1 U into CNS Note that the board and socket are keyed to mate one way only and will lock together when properly mated 5 Replace the top cover and screws 6 Turn on system power N e Note CN4_LBK2 Analog Output Board opt The CNS slot has two release release the memory card Expansion Micro Bus processor The LBK MEM1 U Memory Board inserts into the CN5 slot on LogBook s Motherboard PE Card BA 250 W Fast acting CN10 ENi1 Littelfuse 312008 SWW2 CNB_RS 232 422 485 Slot LED LogBook Motherboard CNS Location Reference LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 3 LBK1 Remote LogBook Terminal Hardware Description The LBK1 remote operation terminal connects to LogBook and provides control of the LogBook with no computer attached With the LBK1 the basic LogBook operations can be controlled with a push of a button and acquisition data can still be monitored LogBook can operate without an LBK1 and with no PC attached However such operation requires the use of a programmed PC card Physical Features of LBK1 e The control panel has a 16 line x 40 character back lit LCD display 4 25 x 2 25 in e The keypad has 29 membrane switches Six soft keys
275. t DBKs 9 Digital I O Control DBKs 9 Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs 9 Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs 10 Power Supply DBKs 12 Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System 12 Power Supplies and Power Connectors 14 An Introduction to Power Related DBKs 15 Power Requirements 16 Calculating Your System s Power Needs 18 Additional Reading 21 Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables or setting configuration jumpers and switches Electrical shock or damage to equipment can result even under low voltage conditions The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage You should always handle components carefully and you should never touch connector pins or circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD controlled area Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and wrist straps ESD bags and cartons and related procedures Introduction Daq Systems The term DBK typically refers to a card or module that is used to expand or enhance a primary data acquisition device such as a DaqBook DaqBoard or LogBook As will be seen in the upcoming DBK identification tables DBKs provide a wide variety of data acquisition functions Depending on the DBKs used one or more of the followin
276. t LogBook 300 units do not have this serial board Fuse 8A 250 V Sf a Littelfuse 312008 LBK COM 422 485 aya Inserts into CNS E LBK MEM1 U 16 MB Memory Upgrade Inserts into CNS LBK2 Four Channel Digital to Analog Output Inserts into CN4 Component Location Reference Notes 1 Information regarding LBK1 the remote LogBook Terminal begins on page 4 4 2 The actual LogBook motherboard depicted above for LogBook 360 also applies to LogBook 300 3 The AUX GPS Serial Board is factory installed in LogBook 360 4 The AUX GPS Serial Board is not used in LogBook 300 LogBook User s Manual 919495 LBK and other non DBK Options 5 1 LBK COM 422 485 The standard LogBook communications board supports RS 232 only but as an option the LogBook can be purchased with the additional capability for RS 422 and RS 485 These optional boards p n LBK COM 422 485 have circuitry for three communication protocols If your communication board has the RS 422 485 option you can switch between RS 232 and RS 422 485 by switching the board s orientation in the CNS slot SERIAL COM pinouts for RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 are included on the following page WARNING Electric shock hazard Turn off power to all system connected devices prior to connecting or disconnecting cables or setting hardware configurations Failure to do so could result in electric shock or death and equipment damage even under low volta
277. t follow Connecting DBKs to DaqBook 100 200 Series Devices ISA Type DaqBoards amp LogBooks Reference Notes o DaqBoard 2000 Series and 2000c Series users refer to page 4 o DaqBook 2000 Series users refer to page 5 For DaqBook 100 Series and DaqBook 200 Series devices ISA Type DaqBoards and LogBooks DBK connections are not made directly to the port but through a CA 37 x ribbon cable where x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected For example in addition to providing a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device a CA 37 3 cable includes three additional DB37 connectors These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port Use of a CA 37 16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added The CA 37 x cable system is excellent for DaqBooks LogBooks and ISA type DaqBoards To Power To PC P2 for Digital I O P1 for Analog I O 1 You can connect P2 to You can connect P1 to Daq Book Digital DBKs Analog DBKs 100 200 Series Passive DBKs Power DBKs Passive DBKs P1 P3 for Pulse Frequency High Speed Digital I O You can connect F3 to 2 CA 37 x rig in Y Passive DBKs Only di ISA Type DaqBoard P1 P2 and P3 connectivity aspects are the same as those found in DagBook ig in regard to CA 37 x cables the x indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected to the primary data acquisition device
278. t is explained via the following four examples Note Channel ID and Physical Channel nomenclature appear in the Calculation Function column User Labels will not appear in the function column unless they are identical to a Channel ID or a Physical Channel label Refer to the above screen shots for the examples which follow Cir In addition to understanding the equation aspect of the following examples you should also note the differences between the two types of configuration screens i e an actual real channel and the calculated virtual channel Reference Note You may wish to refer to math or programming books to derive calculation functions that suit your specific application Equation Assistant The following window is opened by the F x button on the Calculated Channel Configuration window The Equation assistant helps to ensure that the proper syntax is used in the Calculation Function column Selecting the corresponding math and logic operators will enter the corresponding commands these commands can also be typed in but using the equation assistant can minimize syntax mistakes No recursion A calculated channel cannot refer to itself directly or indirectly by creating a loop of inter related calculations Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 37 ig Equation Assistant CALC_04 P1_CH14 gt 23 Analog Inputs Digital Inputs Calc Channels GPS Inputs User Label 7 P1_CH14 P1_CH14 A A P
279. t respond properly do the following e Reboot the system e Upon power up re enter the LogBook Configuration e Ensure the configuration settings are correct Change the settings as applicable To begin the test click the Test button Test results should be displayed within a few seconds Test results indicate if the device is online properly connected powered on and ready to transfer the data or offline If the device is online Performance Test will display Download and Upload speed rates These rates represent the maximum speed at which downloading and uploading files can be performed Actual transfer time will depend on channel configuration and the size of the transfer Acquisition Configuration An acquisition is configured using LogView on a PC and then stored as an acquisition setup file on a PC Card The PC Card may be in an attached LogBook 360 or in the PC to be later manually transferred to an unattached LogBook 360 The system s DBK cards are listed the scan sequence is defined the trigger conditions are specified etc Reference Note Configuring the acquisition is described in the LogView section of the user s manual PDF as360 10 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide A Note about Calibration Calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software however some DBKs may require manual calibration LogView s 2 point calibration fine tunes the reading s slope and offset error mx b DBKs working w
280. t via P1 16 main channels that can each accommodate 16 sub channels via multiplexing for a total of 256 analog input channels Fault protection and buffer circuits prevent overloads and cross channel noise due to impedance mismatch e A D Converter The A D converter uses 16 bit resolution 100 kHz sample rate Digital I O 16 high speed digital inputs via P3 three 8 bit TTL programmable I O ports via P2 three TTL inputs via P1 Note that LogBook 360 has P1 P2 and P3 connectors on the motherboard that are connected by ribbon cable to secondary P1 P2 and P3 connectors located on the chassis front panel LogBook 300 s P1 P2 and P3 are located on the rear panel e LBK2 Analog Output optional This option provides four channels of analog output 16 bit 100 kHz 10 VDC e LogBook 360 only Interconnect Board Card Drawer for three DBK cards and three Terminal Panels e Computer Control I O Includes PARALLEL PORT ECP Mode SERIAL PORT for RS 232 or RS 422 485 TERMINAL PORT for LBK1 LogBook Remote Terminal option In addition for LogBook 360 only there is a COM Expansion Card with two serial ports SERIAL AUX and SERIAL GPS These two ports are for connecting auxiliary serial devices such as a Global Positioning System The Use of PC Cards with LogBook After the initial setup you can interact with LogBook via PC Cards A safe swap LED inside the PC Card access door lights when it is safe to change PC Cards You
281. tch the bits per second set for device LogBook Serial Fixed LogBook User s Manual Appendix A 887997 Supplement HopNet Modems A 3 Testing the LogBook and Modem Connectivity In this section steps are provided to Verify the Parallel Port connectivity Configure the LogBook s Serial Connections This configuration is done via Parallel Port Verify that the Serial Fixed Baud Rate functions correctly Use the HopNet Modems to connect the LogBook to the PC Note HopNet Modems are sometimes referred to as serial extenders Verify Parallel Port Connectivity The parallel port connection to the LogBook is used to configure all serial port connections Thus this verification is very important Physically connect the LogBook to the PC using the Parallel Port cable Launch LogView In LogView open the DEVICE pull down menu Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option A list of configured devices should display Select LogBook Parallel Click the lt ATTA CH gt button SN AAA Note that a successful connection 1s required to continue Configure the LogBook for Serial Connections The following steps are performed to verify that the Serial Port can be used to connect the PC to the LogBook 1 Using the RS232 cable physically connect the LogBook to the PC s COMI Port 2 Launch LogView 3 In LogView open the DEVICE pull down menu 4 Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option A list of configured devices sho
282. the Hardware Configuration button It is the first button in row two of the Log View s toolbar In the dialog box that appears select the Serial COM node 10 To the Right of the dialog box select Connection at Fixed Baud Configuring and Testing le AN A A 6 a 8 9 Set the configuration properties and RTS Mode to the following values Configuration Properties Connection Connection at Fixed Baud Baud Rate 115000 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 RTS Mode Input Buffer Full Click lt OK gt Click the lt DOWNLOAD gt button to transmit the configuration to the LogBook Click the lt DETA CH gt button Turn LogBook s power OFF This is required to initialize the changes Failure to complete step 4 Detach and step 5 Power OFF will result in a failure to initialize configuration changes Turn the LogBook ON Open the DEVICE pull down menu Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option Select LogBook HopNet Note The Baud Rate is 115000 It should match the baud rate set in step 1 10 Make sure that the two HopNet Modems are relatively close to each other Later you can relocate them Refer to the HopNet 10 Series Wireless Modems User s Manual in regard to allowable ranges A 6 Supplement HopNet Modems 887997 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A 11 OPTION Remove the Parallel Port cable that connects the LogBook to the PC At this point the Parallel Port cable i
283. the DBK33 can be internal or external and will power both internal and external DBK cards When the JP1 and JP2 jumpers are both out the following apply o If using internal DBKs you will need to use an internal DBK33 o If using external DBKs you will need to use an external DBK33 Leave jumpers JP1 and JP2 in place unless a DBK33 is being used If a DBK33 is being used configure the P1 interconnect board according to the above table Qs360 4 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide 7 Install power card if necessary If you determined in step 5 that additional power was needed add a DBK32A or DBK33 power card to the chassis The DBK Option Cards amp Modules User s Manual includes detailed information regarding these power related cards A Carefully align the power card s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on the interconnect board and gently press them together B Mount the power card with two screws into the standoffs on the card drawer 8 Configure DBK cards Configure unique channel addresses with the jumpers on the DBK cards Some cards have other jumpers and or DIP switches Refer to the specific DBK sections of the DBK Options Manual p n 457 0905 as needed 9 Install DBK cards You must use all analog DBK cards in the LogBook 360 unless you have a factory modification that allows the use of all digital cards You can not use both analog and digital cards at the same time A Carefully align the DBK c
284. the PC These are parallel port serial port to serial port serial port to USB and manual transportation of the PC Card Note that the parallel port method is represented in the previous figure a Parallel port to parallel port Jf using the parallel port connect a DB25male to DB25female parallel cable e g CA 35 2 or CA 35 6 2ft or 6ft respectively to PARALLEL PORT on LogBook 360 and to the corresponding parallel port on the host PC When this method is used the PC must be set to the ECP mode See ECP Parallel Port page QS360 9 for additional information b Serial port to serial port If using the serial port use a null modem serial cable CA 47 to connect the DB9 SERIAL PORT on LogBook 360 to the corresponding DB9 serial port on the host PC Qs360 6 LogBook 360 Quick Start Guide c Serial port to USB port Requires an adapter kit To connect the LogBook to a USB port you will need a RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p n CA 232 USB KIT available from Measurement Computing Refer to the associated Quick Start document QS RS 232 to USB Interface pdf for a list of the kit s contents and for RS 232 to USB conversion instructions The pdf is included on Data Acquisition CD rev 8 1 2 and higher d PC Card With PC Card communication LogBook 360 does not require a connection to the computer as communication is accomplished via the PC Card To provide the PC Card with the correct configuration file it must be co
285. the option board is positioned on LogBook s internal slot CNS such that the RS 232 communication mode is enabled If your LogBook has the LBK COM 422 485 option and you are uncertain about the communication mode refer to chapter 5 LBK and other non DBK options The chapter section entitled LBK COM 422 485 explains how to set the communications option for RS 232 2 Connect the modem to the LogBook s 9 pin Serial COM port Refer to your modem instruction manual for connection issues recommended configurations and cable types ar 5 Description Not Used connects to TxD connects to RxD Not Used Common connects to Common DB9 Connector Not Used male connects to CTS connects to RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Modem Connection to LogBook s Serial COM Port 3 Turn power on to the LogBook and the modem 7 12 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual Step Y 4 Configure the PC s Communication Parameters 1 Launch the Control Panel applet by navigating as follows from the Windows Desktop Start gt Settings gt gt Control Panel gt LogBook Configuration 2 From the Add New Hardware dialog box select Fj LogBook Config aiai E Add Device LogBook Properties Port Settings Test Hardware 3 Select Serial Port from the Connection Type pull e down list following figure Device Name 4 From the Device Connection pull down list se
286. to three DBKs If a system has more than 3 DBKs the 10 slot DBK41 can be used Several DBK41s can be daisy chained to accommodate many DBKs in one system Expansion and Connection General Product Name Description DBK1 16 Connector BNC Adapter Module DBK10 3 Slot Expansion Chassis P1 P2 or P3 DBK11A Screw Terminal Option Card DB37 Screw Terminal Block P1 P2 or P3 sockets DBK40 BNC Interface DBK41 Analog Expansion Enclosure DBK60 Expansion Chassis with Termination Panels P1 or P2 Termination Panels Connectivity for DaqBoard 260 Name Description Connects To Termination Panel Blank rear panel Termination Panel BNC rear panel Termination Panel Safety Jacks single ended Termination Panel Safety Jacks differential DBK605 Termination Panels Thermocouple differential panels 16 differential DBK Card specify type B J K R S or T DBK606 Termination Panel 3 Terminal Blocks 16 connections per TB DBK Card DBK607 Termination Panel strain relief clamp DBK608 Termination Panel 3 female DB37 connectors three DB37 DBK Card Several signal connection options were developed primarily for use with DaqBoard 2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard 2000c Series Boards The DBK200 Series P4 Adapter documentation provides the basic connection concepts That information along with the related DBK subsections should enable you to set up your desired configuration Connection Interface Boards and Modules Product Descript
287. tom of the spreadsheet contains a context sensitive Help Box for the selected field As you configure channel parameters the Help box identifies the field and provides pertinent user information An example taken from the previous figure follows Example In the above figure the User Label cell of channel 1 is selected The Help box identifies the field as User specified channel label and states user options In this case they are 1 to type in a desired label 1 e to provide the channel with more meaningful name not to exceed 16 characters or 2 keep the default label of P1_CH0O0 User Input Software Reference To set up channel parameters first select the appropriate cell highlighted in a bold box with the mouse or keyboard arrow keys up down sideways Some cells allow you to key in values from a keyboard values such as user labels offsets etc When key in cells are selected a user input box will appear where you can type in characters as needed e g channel label in previous figure Some cells allow you to choose the desired setting from a drop down list you select among the options and the parameter is set Other cells allow you to set numeric values with spinner up down arrows that change the value incrementally selecting a point between the spinners changes the mouse action into a virtual scroll bar as you drag the mouse vertically the numeric values change accordingly 989592 LogView LV 7 Numeri
288. ton lower right will convert and merge the files TEST R1 B1 1 BIN gt TEST R B1 1 BIN TEST R2 B1 1 BIN TEST R3 B1 1 BIN TEST R4 B1 1 BIN _ Concatenating Linking Segments awa Elect File s To Merge Concatenate Look irr E data al al Type Test Ri 61 1 B1N SKB Binary Data 716 99 1 43 06 PM Test R1 61 2 BIN BKE Binary Data 7 16 99 1 43 16 PM 1 Test R1 B1 3 BIN OKE Binary Data 7 16 99 1 43 26 PM a Test R1 B1 4 BIN MEB Binary Data 7116 99 1 43 44 PM wa Test R1 B1 5 BIN 12KE Binary Data 7 16 99 1 43 50 PM Filename Merge subrates Execute Concatenate segments Eat LV 52 LogView 989592 Software Reference qa elect File s To MergefConcatenate 5 Files Binary Data 716 99 1 46 45 PM File Convert Utility Screen Shown Both Before and After Selecting Concatenate Segments When the Concatenate Segments box is checked the File Convert utility groups the Segment files together and displays a single item In the example the single item is TEST R1 B1 BIN The number of files that this item describes is now shown in size column of the list box 5 files Selecting TEST R1 B1 BIN and then clicking the lt Execute gt button lower right of utility will both convert and concatenate the files TEST R1 B1 1 BIN gt TEST R1 B1 BIN TEST R1 B1 2 BIN TEST R1 B1 3 BIN TEST R1 B1 4 BIN TEST R1 B1 5 BIN _ Note For applications that require conti
289. ttaching it to the TTL trigger input pin 25 on P1 e With a logic device you can engage the TTL trigger on P1 s pin 25 as programmed e Without a computer you can use the LBK1 s manual trigger button LogBook time of day clock has 1 256 second resolution for data logging applications where acquisitions must be performed at specific times during the day The time of occurrence of each acquisition and its trigger are also recorded with the data The scan to scan timing may be set by a fixed frequency pacer clock Or an external clock can start each scan individually to allow the scan rate to track a variable speed event such as engine revolutions Note Time stamping is done in 1 256 second units but the absolute trigger is in 1 second units For data acquisition applications that include both fast and slow signals multiple sample rates can be configured In the acquisition setup dialog box a primary acquisition rate and divisors for up to 3 more rates can be configured Using multiple sample rates fast signals like vibration can be sampled at a high rate while slow signals like thermocouples are sampled at lower rates optimizing the system s storage capacity Scan Rate Limitations LogBook s internal clock runs at 100 kHz and this is the fastest scan rate possible with just one input channel in the scan list and no outputs As input calculated and output channels are added to the scan list the usable scan rate is correspondi
290. type For example Analog DBKs to port P1 Digital DBKs to port P2 and passive DBKs to port P3 There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook 2000 AEX device The first method is preferable as it introduces less noise Preferred Method a Connect a CA 37 x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector P1 P2 or P3 on the DaqBook 2000 Series device b Connect the free end of the cable to the DBK card or module Optional Method a Connect a CA 195 x cable to the P4 connector on the DaqBook 2000 Series device b Connect the free end of the cable to a DBK200 Series device c Connect the DBK option to the DBK200 Series device as applicable The primary reason that less noise is seen in the preferred method is that a DaqBook 2000 AEX device s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I O This provides a strong degree of isolation between the two signal types However in the case of a CA 195 x cable connected to P4 digital and analog signals co exist in one cable If you need to use the P4 connection method use of the 8 inch ribbon cable CA 195 1 will result in the lowest level of crosstalk for that method The CE Cable Kit p n CA 209D may be required for systems that require a P4 cable length of 3 feet The CA 209D kit includes a shielded version of the CA 195 cable two grounding pigtails and associated cable clamps When properly c
291. uld display 5 Select LogBook Serial 6 Click the lt ATTACH gt button Note that a successful connection 1s required to continue A 4 Supplement HopNet Modems 887997 LogBook User s Manual Appendix A Test the Serial Fixed Baud Rate for the LogBook Making the Initial Setup L E E a a 5 Make sure that the LogBook is still connected to the PC via Parallel Port cable If not make the connection Launch LogView In LogView open the DEVICE pull down menu Click on the SELECT LOGBOOK option A list of configured devices should display Select LogBook Parallel Click the lt ATTA CH gt button Press the lt H W gt button This is the Hardware Configuration button It is the first button in row two of the Log View s toolbar Select the Serial COM node in the dialog box that appears Select the Connection at Fixed Baud option This appears on the right side of the dialog box Configuring and Testing 1 oe i 6 de 8 9 Set the configuration properties and RTS Mode to the following values Configuration Properties Connection Connection at Fixed Baud Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 RTS Mode Input Buffer Full Click lt OK gt Click the lt DOWNLOAD gt button to transmit the configuration to the LogBook Click the lt DETA CH gt button Turn LogBook s power OFF This is required to initialize the changes Failure to complete
292. uler 7 19 Notes 7 20 Using Modems and the Upload Scheduler 958896 LogBook User s Manual CE Compliance 8 Overview 8 1 CE Standards and Directives 8 1 Safety Conditions 8 2 Emissions Immunity Conditions 8 3 CE Enhancements for Existing Products 8 3 Edge Guards for DBK5 DBK8 and DBK44 8 3 DBK41 CE 8 3 BNC Connectors for CE Compliance 8 4 Overview CE standards were developed by the European Union EU dating from 1985 and include specifications both for safety and for EMI emissions and immunity Now all affected products sold in EU countries must meet such standards Although not required in the USA these standards are considered good engineering practice since they enhance safety while reducing noise and ESD problems In contracted and in internal tests most of our products met the required specifications Products that were not originally in compliance were redesigned accordingly In some cases alternate product versions shield plates edge guards special connectors or add on kits are required to meet CE compliance CE compliant products bear the CE mark and include a Declaration of Conformity stating the particular specifications and conditions that apply Test Records and supporting documentation that validate compliance are kept on file at the factory CE Standards and Directives The electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives specify two basic re
293. upply to Expansion Devices Available Power pg 18 DBK Basics LogBook 5 VDC 0 10 A from P1 1 P2 18 P2 20 P3 20 15 VDC 0 15 A from P1 21 15 VDC 0 05 A from P3 19 15 VDC 0 15 A from P1 2 15 VDC 0 05 A from P3 37 DaqBook 100 DaqBook 112 DaqBook 120 DaqBook 200 DaqBook 216 DaqBook 260 2100 mW 2400 mW 2100 mW 4000 mW 4000 mW 4000 mW DaqBook 2000 AEX 15000 mW 5V at 1 A 15 V at 500 mA each DaqBook 2001 2005 10 000 mW DaqBoard 100A DaqBoard 112A DaqBoard 200A DaqBoard 216A DaqBoard 260A DaqBoard 2000 Series 500 amp 2000c Series 3300 mW 3300 mW 3000 mW 3000 mW 3000 mW QO mW 5 V at 1 A 15 V at 75 mA each with exception of DaqBoard 2002 and 2002c Daq PC Card 112B O mW Daq PC Card 216B 0 mW 967794 Daq Systems Available Power Chart Supply to Expansion Devices Product Available Power DBK32 7500 mW DBK32A 15000 mW DBK33 7500 mW DBK34 5 A hr in 12 V mode fused at 8 A DBK34A 5 A hr in 12 V mode fused at 8 A Use the following procedure and table to calculate the required system power 1 In the Quantity column 5th list the number of DBKs of that type in your system 2 In the Sub Total column 7th enter the product of column 5 and column 6 mW 3 Add the Sub Total column and enter the sum at the bottom right of the table This result is your power requirement in mW DBK32 DBK32A and DBK34 cannot supply 5 VDC In cases that require 5 VDC if t
294. vice Typically serial devices send a block of ASCII data or an ASCII sentence terminated by CR LF on a periodic basis once per second for example Knowing this rate will allow you to set up your sample rate for the serial channel s intelligently To capture every value transmitted by the serial device set the sample rate for the serial channel at about twice the rate of the serial data transmission rate To successfully parse and convert fields within the serial data string complete knowledge of the string format must be known For each serial channel a format string must be created which perfectly describes the expected message The Windows Hyperterminal application is sometimes helpful for inspecting the serial strings sourced by a device What you need to know about your GPS The LogBook has direct support for all GPSs that conform to the NMEA 0183 protocol A GPS of this kind can be connected and operated without any knowledge of the communication or protocol parameters The included GPS support makes use of the NMEA 0183 s GGA message yielding Longitude Latitude Altitude UTC time and Quality of fix If additional GPS parameters are desired serial channels can be defined to capture them just like parameters from general non GPS devices To maximize flexibility user defined serial channels and pre defined GPS channels can be used concurrently on the same GPS device For example the GPS Longitude channel can be enabl
295. w 989592 Software Reference Download The Download command downloads the current LogView setup to LogBook if attached or a PC Card if LogBook is unattached with the same name as the Log View setup name If the current setup is default named Untitled a dialog box asks Enter the acquisition name before LogView will Done download current configuration Select OK to save Cancel to stop download process Or Down Download The Download As command works much like a Download As ME As a Save As command and brings up the window shown at left You can choose your own file Device a ota name When fields contain the correct data select the lt Download gt button or you may Acq Mame alii e El Start acquisition on Power On The checkbox Start acquisition on Power On is default checked so that a remote LogBook will Download Lancel begin an acquisition as soon as it is turned on You can uncheck this box if you will be using an LBK1 to arm the acquisition or if you will be applying power to LogBook but not wanting to begin an acquisition immediately Configuration Report Configuration Report allows you to save a report of the configuration parameters An example follows Save Acquisition Configuration Report As Save in E LogView v cs z data Readme txt File name Untitles Save as type Text file txt y Cancel Configuration Report Window selected fro
296. would like to save data for Exception capturing is most effective when you can set trigger parameters to isolate the particular data of interest e g all data 2 minutes before and after a specific event 4 Inthe Post trigger tab you can set the stop event based on a duration an analog or digital event or a manual Event Mark Acquisition Configuration Acquisition Configuration Ml Infinite Rears Humber of Re arme WM MA Infinite Rears Number of Re arme WAN F Trigger Block Definition 7 T Trigger Block Definition 7 Pre trigger Fost trigger Fre trigger Post trigger Stop on Duain E EEC Enable auto Re arm by setting the field to 10 Set up input channels as needed in the Analog Input Channel Configuration window Save the setup file download it to the PC Card and start the acquisition After the data has been acquired upload the data files from the PC Card with Log View s Explorer or lt Upload gt button Note that individual trigger blocks for each capture have indexed file names with each name being unique oo Se Reference Note The File Management section of this document which begins on page LV 8 contains detailed information regarding filename structure Software Reference 989592 LogView LV 23 Menu Descriptions The rest of the document module describes each menu in detail including all the related windows and parameters The menus are presented in the order they appear in the control win
297. ysis 1S easier The next figure shows a time line with data being collected continuously but only the trigger block is logged to memory the pre trigger and post trigger data combined 1s called a trigger block Trigger Parameters Setup The following figures represent Trigger Setups with and Analog Channel as a trigger source channel P1_CH14 and a Calculated Channel as a trigger source CALC_00 Other possible trigger sources are When Armed Manual Digital Channel GPS Channel LogBook 360 only and Absolute Time Acquisition Configuration Infinite Reams Number of Re arms fo mi Infinite Rearms Number of Re arms fo B Cc F Trigger Block Definition AAA j Trigger Block Definition Pre trigger Trigger Fost trigger Pre trigger Trigger Post trigger ls PEETA Source Calculated Charin As Analog Channel e1_cm1 4 a CALC 00 ERE Condition Rising Edge Condition Rising Edge y Threshold fi e Valk Threshold li O a Hysteresis foo Volt Hysteresis joo a Trigger Setup Using an Analog Channel Trigger Setup Using a Calculated Channel The manual trigger can be implemented in the following ways e With a PC attached you can trigger LogBook from LogView s LogBook Monitor window in the Device menu e Without a PC you can use the Remote LogBook Terminal LBK1 lt Manual Trigger gt button The auto re arm feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to take p

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file